JP2021115133A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can enhance the expectation of a player and enhance the exaltation of the player.SOLUTION: Suggestive performance execution means can execute a performance that reduces the visibility to the second low visible state having the lower visibility than the first low visible state after temporarily reducing the visibility of performance identification information different from specific performance identification information to the first low visible state with the display of the effect display as a suggestive performance. Notification performance execution means can execute a performance that makes the performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible as a notification performance. The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even in a case where the specific performance identification information is not temporarily stopped, and can continuously display the effect display for a prescribed period after the elapse of a prescribed timing in a case where the specific performance identification information is not temporarily stopped.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-35

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information including specific effect identification information, deriving and displaying a display result, and controlling the player in an advantageous state.

In the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol (effect identification information), and during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (specific effect identification information) is re-variablely displayed. There are some that can execute a pseudo continuous effect (specific effect) including (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-131876

However, in Patent Document 1, since no effect is executed when the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, not only is it not possible to raise the player's expectation that the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, but also the pseudo-ream is not possible. There is a problem that the player's feeling of exhilaration cannot be enhanced when the symbol is temporarily stopped.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the expectation of a player and enhancing the uplifting feeling of a player. ..

The gaming machine of means 1 is
In addition to executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including the specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) is performed. The display result is derived and displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. 1)
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part to execute step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
An update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion that executes step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
The effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the display image data Since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing and the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 after the switching timing of the display image data, it is displayed more than before the switching timing of the display image data. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the image data switching timing),
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, shown in FIG. 16-13). As shown in the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part where step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-13). , The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, the transparency of the effect display is increased after the predetermined timing at which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, so that the player is made aware that the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and the effect display is easy to visually recognize. By increasing the attention to the background image, the player's disappointment that the specific effect identification information did not temporarily stop can be alleviated. In addition, the relief of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
Along with executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) is performed to derive and display the display result, and the specific display result (for example). , A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed.
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part to execute step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
An update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion that executes step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
The effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the display image data Since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing and the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 after the switching timing of the display image data, it is displayed more than before the switching timing of the display image data. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the image data switching timing),
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, shown in FIG. 16-13). As shown in the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part where step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-13). , The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, the transparency of the effect display is increased after the predetermined timing at which the special identification information is temporarily stopped, so that the player is made aware that the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and the effect display is transparent to facilitate visual recognition. By increasing the attention to the background image, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment that the special identification information did not temporarily stop. In addition, the relief of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 3 or means 4. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, the number of special figure games (number of times variable display is executed) executed in a normal gaming state as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.) is 1000. When the big hit (advantageous state) does not occur even if the number of times (special number of times) is reached (the special condition is satisfied), the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state, and the probability that the big hit is decided as a result of the special figure game is high. It is increased to about 1/100, and big hits are likely to occur in subsequent special figure games, and big hits occur even if the number of special figure games (variable display execution number) reaches 1000 times in the normal game state. When not, there was something that generated a time saving state instead of a probabilistic state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief of the player when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the special number is insufficient, and in view of this point, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. There is a demand for the provision of various gaming machines.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
It is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. It ’s a game machine,
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part to execute step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
It is provided with an update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) in which numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display.
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, shown in FIG. 16-13). As shown in the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part where step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-13). , The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine of means 3,
Step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120 is executed as shown in FIG. 16-49, which can execute a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is executed. Part) and
Based on the establishment of the special condition, the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 16-52 (C1) and (C2) of the special notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started. , Blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 16-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 16-54 (C), etc.) and a special notification effect executing means (for example, , A portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638), as shown in FIGS. 16-23).
The predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-44, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control CPU 120 in step 108IWS802A. 16-50).
According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the operation of the 2nd movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a jackpot hold memory, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a lost hold memory. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of each production period and production content in a pseudo-continuous production. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing a special temporary stop notification effect execution decision ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing a temporary stop notification effect period determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the output mode of the sound output from a speaker. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion effect period at the time of temporary stop of a pseudo continuous symbol. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of the change of the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols in the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the temporary stop notification effect period. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transparency of a concentrated line and an effect image in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demonstration production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading notice effect execution decision table, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. This is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the relief time shifts to shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the production mode of the time saving rushing appearance effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a specific example of the production mode of the countdown effect and the effect effect of Gase. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the next fluctuation postponement processing in modification 1. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating modification 2-4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in Example 2. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 1 of the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 2 of the second embodiment.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time saving" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and open upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the out-of-game symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the out-of-game symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the jackpot type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "out of place", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "out of time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. While only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020-1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the common numerical range (of the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1) When only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving is out, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio at which the variable display result is out of time reduction is the same ratio for all the set values, so that the gambling property depends on the set value. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, with regard to the time-saving loss, which is assigned a common number of judgment values for each setting value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from the time-saving loss reference value of 65317 in any setting value, it can be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time reduction.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command that specifies to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature Unit 193SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 193SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 193SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is not temporarily stopped, the suggestion effect execution means is determined to temporarily stop the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in the case of the temporary stop. The effect display is moved toward the position (for example, a portion where the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-48 as a modification 193SG-1).
The gaming machine according to the first or second embodiment.
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) has not been temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
The effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the display image data is displayed. Since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing and the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 after the switching timing of the display image data, it is displayed more than before the switching timing of the display image data. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the image data switching timing),
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by increasing the transparency of the effect display after a predetermined timing at which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped. A game in which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by making the player recognize that and raising the attention to the background image which is easy to see through the effect display. It can alleviate the disappointment of a person.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
The suggestion effect executing means puts the effect display at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops. When any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is deleted before the stop display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). In the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, the concentrated line is hidden before the decorative symbols of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of outliers, stop. Part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 4, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for a temporary stop.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (G) to 11-35 (H)). In addition, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern has a crack and explodes),
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the effect position (for example, the first effect position) overlaps with at least a part of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information). A movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 5, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress the player that the temporary stop is caused by the movement of the movable body and the deformation of the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
The movable body is
The area that overlaps the first operation (for example, the movement from the retracted position shown in FIG. 11-2 to the first effect position) and the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is smaller than that of the first operation. It is possible to perform the second operation (for example, the movement from the retracted position shown in FIG. 11-2 to the second effect position).
In the notification effect, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (F), the portion where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect. ),
The gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
According to this feature, it is possible to impress the player that the temporary stop has been made while preventing the movable body from making it difficult to visually recognize the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of Form 8 is
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034).
In the first operation, the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-2, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped during the temporary stop notification effect. The part that emits light with the color of the concentrated line displayed in the suggestion effect),
The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.
According to this feature, since the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display, the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, FIGS. 11-35 (F) and 11-35 (G)). As shown in the above, a portion for moving the second movable body 193SG033 from the first effect position to the retracted position before the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth embodiment.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is deleted.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (G) to 11-35 (H)). In addition, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern has a crack and explodes),
After the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, a specific effect corresponding display (for example, display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) suggesting that the N + 1th variable display is executed is displayed. Displayable specific effect-compatible display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
A movable body (for example, the second movable body 193SG033) that can operate at an effect position (for example, a first effect position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific effect corresponding display displayed by the specific effect corresponding display means.
To prepare
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase the attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034).
The light emitting unit emits light in an manner corresponding to the specific effect corresponding display (for example, when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start number notification effect, it is blue, and when displaying "x3". Is green, and when "x4" is displayed, it is red (the part that emits the second movable LED 193SG034), respectively.
The gaming machine according to the form 10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, since the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the display corresponding to another variable display, it is possible to attract attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestion effect is executed, the special effect (for example, a portion displaying the temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5). (For example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
With
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestion effect is displayed in preference to the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestion effect (for example, instead of the normal decorative symbol, a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. A portion of the image display device 5 that is moved and displayed from above to below),
As the special effect, the special effect executing means has a first effect period (for example, FIG. 11-) until the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves to a predetermined position and temporarily stops. As shown in 33, the predetermined position because the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) did not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing (the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect). It is possible to execute an effect related to the transition between the second effect period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect) and the second effect period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33). As shown in FIGS. 11-33, 11-35, and 11-44, a portion displaying a concentrated line while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh forms.
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestion effect becomes easy, and the transition to the second effect period becomes unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by the special effect. It is possible to prevent the information from being lost.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
As the special effect, the special effect executing means receives the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position at a position different from the predetermined position and the second effect. It is possible to execute an effect of overlapping and displaying the semi-transparent specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) at a position corresponding to the period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5). The part that displays),
The gaming machine according to Form 12, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the transition to the second production period can be made more natural.

The gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means can combine and display displays drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4, image data 1, image data 2, and an image. Data 3 and data drawn as image data 4 can be combined and displayed on the image display device 5).
The drawing layer on which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer on which the effect display of the suggestion effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 11-3). As shown in the above, a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as the image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn as the image data 2, and a concentrated line is drawn as the image data 4).
The gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13, characterized in that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect can be drawn separately from the effect display of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect and the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) can be drawn. ) And the degree of freedom of special production can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect of transforming the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and then moving and erasing the effect (for example, FIG. 11-35 (G). )-As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (H), 11-36 (I), and 11-36 (J), the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the player side after it has a crack and explodes. (Hidden part),
After the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deleted, the specific effect corresponding display (for example, "x2", "x3", "x3" suggesting that the N + 1th variable display is executed. It is further provided with a specific effect-compatible display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of displaying (display such as × 4).
The specific effect-compatible display means can move and erase the specific effect-compatible display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-37, display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. The part that is hidden after being moved toward the player side),
The effect identification information in the N + 1th variable display becomes visible between the time when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deleted and the time when the specific effect corresponding display is deleted (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-37 (O), when "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 14, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the effect of the notification effect and the display corresponding to the specific effect can be enhanced, and the effect identification information becomes visible before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased, so that the variable display is restarted. Can be easily recognized by the player.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
The notice effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect display processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) that can execute the advance notice effect for notifying that the advantageous state is likely to be obtained by using the effect identification information. Part)
The advance notice effect execution means limits the execution of the advance notice effect when the specific effect corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-3, the first variable display start number notification effect is ". When the display of "x2", "x3", and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the part that restricts the execution of the advance notice effect),
The gaming machine according to the form 15, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to easily recognize that the variable display is restarted by executing the advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
Both the movement of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the movement of the specific effect corresponding display are movements toward the player who is playing (for example, the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and the game is played. The part that is moved and displayed toward the player side and the part where the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4" is moved and displayed toward the player side),
The gaming machine according to Form 15 or Form 16, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the impression given to the player can be enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
The special effect (for example, the blast shown in the modified example 193SG-4) that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed. It is provided with a special effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a visibility-inhibiting image such as an image).
The specific effect executing means makes it possible to visually recognize the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to see by the special effect (for example, variant 193SG). As shown in -4, the part that executes revariable display after hiding the visibility-impaired image),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 17, characterized in that.
According to this feature, before the display including the effect identification information corresponding to the resumption of the variable display is started, a special effect that makes the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) difficult to see is executed. It can be easily understood that the variable display is restarted.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
An image display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying the variable display of the effect identification information and the effect display of each effect, and
A plate material provided on the player side of the image display means and having transparency so that the player can visually recognize the display of the image display means, and the special image can be displayed by emitting light from the outer peripheral side surface. A light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in the modified example 193SG-4) and
With
In the special effect, the special effect executing means makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the player displays the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 by displaying the visibility-inhibiting image on the light guide plate. Parts that are difficult to see),
The gaming machine according to the form 18, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, the impression of the player can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is the specific effect after the predetermined timing. The movement speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the display image is different from the movement speed of the effect identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33). The moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the data switching timing is V3),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 19, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is before or after a predetermined timing at which the temporary stop is temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined position before the predetermined timing is determined. After the predetermined timing, the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-5). Even if the continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous symbol returns to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once starting to move downward of the image display device 5. In this case, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing and the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5 are provided. The part that makes the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern different from the movement speed when returning to the part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 20, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the movement is a movement before passing the predetermined position or a return movement after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, the suggestion effect executing means restricts the display of the effect display (for example, variant example 193SG). As shown in −5, when the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5, the concentrated line is not displayed again).
The gaming machine according to the mode 21, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it can be further understood that the movement is a return movement after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped is the specific after the temporary stop. The moving speed of the pseudo-linked symbol before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-linked symbol is V1 as shown in FIGS. 11-34, which is different from the moving speed at which the effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34). However, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is V2),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 19, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The moving direction before the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is different from the moving direction in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves after the temporary stop (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35, the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop moves from the upper side to the lower side, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is directed to the player side (front side). The part that moves),
The gaming machine according to the form 23.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement is after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the movement.

FIG. 11-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in the feature unit 193SG. As shown in FIG. 11-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is provided with a drive motor (not shown), and can be operated by the effect control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. Further, a second movable body LED 193SG034 for causing the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light is built in the second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the second movable body 193SG033 in the non-operating state is arranged at a lower position (evacuation position) of the image display device 5 between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. Since most of the second movable body 193SG033 is concealed by the game board 2 at the retracted position, it is difficult for the player to see.

The second movable body 193SG033 in the feature unit 193SG is shown in FIG. 11-2 as a jackpot notification when the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect, which will be described later, are executed during the variable display, and during the reach effect of the super reach. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Of these, when the temporary stop notification effect is executed and when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the image display device 5. While moving (moving) to the first effect position, which is the front position, when executing the jackpot notification in the reach effect of the super reach, the second movable body 193SG003 is as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). It moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second effect position, which is the front position of the image display device 5 and above the first effect position.

Although not particularly shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first effect position or the second effect position returns to the retracted position from the first effect position or the second effect position according to the elapse of a predetermined period. It has become.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect, so that a part of the second movable body 193SG overlaps with the pseudo-continuous symbol in the front view. (See FIG. 11-35 (F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second effect position is limited to the time when the jackpot notification during the super reach effect is executed. That is, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first effect position is also an operation in which the area overlapping with the pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than the movement from the retracted position to the second effect position.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0%, depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) to 11-3 (D) and 11-4 (A) to 11-4 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5. , An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 11-3 shows image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect (see FIG. 11-35) in the feature unit 193SG, and FIG. 11-4 shows the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped. It is the image data when it does not stop.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the image data 1 has a pseudo-continuous symbol (this feature) in the central portion (“middle” decorative symbol display area 5C) of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. In the section, it is data drawn to display a temporary stop suggestion image suggesting that the symbol (the symbol displayed as “NEXT”) is stopped (temporarily stopped).

The pseudo-ream symbol in the feature unit 193SG is a special symbol that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative symbol. This is a symbol in which a revariable display (pseudo-continuous effect) of a decorative symbol is executed by temporarily stopping the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is a symbol displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. It may be.

Further, in the present feature unit 193SG, a form in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is used as a special symbol displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect is illustrated as a part of the decorative symbol. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol displayed as a part of the variable display even during the period during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect together with the normal decorative symbol.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is to be a symbol different from the decorative symbol, the normal decorative symbol (the symbol of the numbers "1" to "9" of the main feature portion) is temporarily stopped at the central portion of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol to a pseudo-ream symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 (B) and 11-4 (A), in the image data 2, the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous symbol is directed from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. The data is drawn to display the movement display of the image, and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol, the image display device 5 is replaced with the pseudo-continuous symbol from above to below. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in this feature unit 193SG).

Further, the image data 2 displays the swing display of the decorative symbol in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, and does not display the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is also image data for displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the image data 3 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 (C) and 11-4 (C), the image data 4 is displayed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display) of the image display device 5. This is data drawn to display a concentrated line toward the area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in the image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Although not particularly shown, the image data in the feature unit 193SG includes not only the image data 1 to the image data 4 but also the image data 5 drawn to display the background image in the image display device 5. .. The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4. That is, in the feature unit 193SG, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer data among the images displayed on the image display device 5.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the upper side to the lower side of the pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the image data 4. The image based on the image (concentrated line) is displayed with priority, and the image based on the image data 1 (temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D), the image based on the image data 3 (from the central portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The downward movement display) is displayed with priority over the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 4, and the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the upper side to the lower side of the decorative pattern) is the image data. The image based on 3 and the image based on the image data 4 are displayed with priority over the image.

The transmittance of the concentrated line in the feature unit 193SG is set high (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (C) and 11-4 (D), during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the player can see the decorative symbol, the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the temporary stop suggestion through the concentrated line. The image is visible.

In particular, in the feature unit 193SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 11-3 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped. Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIGS. 11-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 11-3) is switched to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 11-4 does not temporarily stop (FIG. 11-4).

FIG. 11-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 193SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning judgment result, a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or abrupt probability), and a small hit. Is. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-6, in the feature unit 193SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 193SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 193SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 193SG, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 193SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 193SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 193SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 193SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 11-8 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 193SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 193SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-8 (B). In the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change jackpot A" and "probability change jackpot B" that are executed and shift to the high-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy low-base state in which the high-accuracy control is executed but the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the big hit game by the "probability change big hit C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 193SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this feature unit 193SG, when it is determined to be "probability variation big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 11-9). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 193SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-9 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG. In this feature unit 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 193SG provides two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and the normal reach fluctuation pattern may be set to 1. It may be only the type. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 193SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, the normal reach variation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variablely displays the decorative symbol during the variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect that executes the pseudo-continuous effect once during the variable display. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. ..

In addition, in this feature unit 193SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG, the higher the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG. In this feature unit 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-10, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super) It is decided from the reach pseudo-continuous production 3 times jackpot fluctuation pattern). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 2-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 3-time jackpot fluctuation pattern) ) And decide.

As shown in FIG. 11-10, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%. PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than the case where there is a non-probability variation jackpot. It has become. Furthermore, paying attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, more pseudo-continuous effects are generated during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. It is easier to execute. Therefore, in the feature unit 193SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are set to PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production one-time out-of-range fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are set to PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PA1-4 using the deviation pattern determination table D. It is determined from (non-reach out-of-time shortening variation pattern) and PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time variation pattern).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 193SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a high rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first starting winning) is generated, but has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map reservation storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 193SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 193SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 193SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 193SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 193SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194. The reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 193SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A of the feature unit 193SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 7) is undecided. That is, the display pattern is undecided because the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize. The display undecided flag indicating the above and the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set, respectively, corresponding to the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A of the feature unit 193SG, a storage area can be stored so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Is secured for each storage area (entry). In the command analysis process (Fig. 11-18), the effect restriction flag is a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a number of reserved memories, although a start prize is generated at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. If the notification command is not received within the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later, it is a flag indicating that the entry is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U provided in the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, a quadrangle (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) Or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 193SG5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 193SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the command buffer 193SG194A received at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 11-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 193SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 193 SGS 102 (step 193 SGS 102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (step). 193SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 193 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 193SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS105 (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (step). 193SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 193SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first special figure is stored. 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 193SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start opening prize designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 193SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 193 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the process of step 193SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 193 SGS112 of FIG. 11-13 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 193SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 11-14) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 5, FIG. 11-15), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 193SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit, for example, to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine. The current gaming state in 1 is specified (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 193SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 11-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each determination as the random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7. 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 11-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 193SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 193SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 193SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 193SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 193SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance, but among the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. For example, 498 (about 50%) judgment values from 0 to 497 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, and the fluctuation pattern for deviation is assigned. In the judgment table B, 598 judgment values (about 60%) from 0 to 597 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take, and the judgment value is for deviation. In the variation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values (about 70%) from 0 to 697 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 (about 10%) determination values from 898 to 997 in the range that the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the super reach. Is assigned.

Therefore, in step 193 SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 193 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS135), and the step Proceed to 193SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether or not the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

When the determined jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step). 193SGS136), the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

When the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; N), that is, when the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C, the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set. (Step 193SGS137), the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are executed. (Step 193SGS138), the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 is determined by using the numerical data indicating the above. In this feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach). It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 193 SGS 138 to the effect control board 12 is made (step 193 SGS 132), and then the winning random number value determination process is completed.

FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step 193SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 193SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "2" (step 193SGS144), the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 193SGS145). .. The first special figure reservation number is the number of reservations of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 193SGS141 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 193SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the hold storage unit of the first special figure are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 193SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 193SGS148), the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 11-7 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set table 1. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 193SGS150a). In this step 193SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , Step 193 In the process of SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the game state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be selected according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 193SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variation B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability variation C" corresponding to probability variation jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 11-7 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure is compared. It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small hit" (step 193SGS150c). In step 193SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the first special figure. When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, as a result of pre-determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state (the small hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of (whether or not it is done), and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 193SGS154 is "probability variation big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the finalized special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 193SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "probability variation jackpot C", that is, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot B". In the case of either "probability variation jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability change jackpot", the variable pattern determination table A for jackpot is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B". , The jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the determination in step 193SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). When the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game state is changed to the probabilistic state or the time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in (step 193SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 193SGS168; Y). Step 193 SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 193SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. Is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 193SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 193SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 193 SGS 164, step 193 SGS 165, step 193 SGS 167, step 193 SGS 169, step 193 SGS 1711, step 193 SGS 173, and step 193 SGS 174, for example, a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation. By referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table A to D based on the numerical data indicating Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined in the process of step 193SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". That is, the process of step 193 SGS 170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is "off".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 193SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special diagram games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the process of step 193SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 193SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 193SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is first transmitted, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern The command may be transmitted in the order of the designated command, the game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 193SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and when the jackpot flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the jackpot flag is further turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 193SGS190b). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 193SGS184), hit start 1 designated command (probability variation jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variation jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variation jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. ), Set to send the hit start 4 designated command (non-probability change) (step 193SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening opening counter is set (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probable big hit A, 5 times in the case of probable change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probable change big hit C). (Step 193 SGS 188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196 and the value of the time reduction counter. When is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 193SGS194), it corresponds to the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low accuracy and low base) (step 193SGS195), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the jackpot end display time (big hit end display time) on the image display device 5 on the jackpot end display timer. Is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 193SGS210), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS207). After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 193SGS209), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter by executing step 193SGS211 and step 193SGS212. After that, the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probabilistic change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 193SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 11-18, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Determine if there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no reception command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set (set) in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225, which will be described later, has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237), if the waiting time for notifying the first or second reserved storage number has not elapsed (step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second is before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the entry in which the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command is not yet stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a reception command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 193 SGS 222). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192. Just do it.

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 193SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 193SGS224 (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226). If the reception command is not a symbol designation command in step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the receive command is not a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS229). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). Then, when it is the second hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). ..

Then, after executing any of the processes of step 193SGS229 and step 193SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the effect restriction flag is turned on (step). 193SGS232).

When the reception command is a symbol designation command in step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; Y), when the reception command is a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; Y), or step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes of, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 11-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 193SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 193SGS230 (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second hold before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS235; Y), the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the effect restriction flag of the corresponding unstored entry is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to the process of step 193SGS221.

FIG. 11-19 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the effect pattern (display pattern of the hold storage display) of the pre-read notice effect together with the presence / absence of the pre-read notice effect in the pre-read notice setting process (S161). Next, a hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 193SG005D and the second hold storage display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is performed. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not the variable display is being executed may be determined by whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS240b). As shown in FIGS. 11-29 (E), 11-30 (L), and 11-31 (S), the first variable display start count notification effect starts re-variable display as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1. Further, in step 193SGS240a, whether or not the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed may be determined by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), the step By proceeding to 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect.

In step 193SGS241, the effect control CPU 120 checks the start winning command buffer 193SG194A. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning, depending on whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (set to "1") (step 193SGS242). ..

If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 193SGS242; N), the read-ahead notice setting process is finished, and if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 193SGS242; Y). , It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the 4th symbol designation or the 6th symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit ( Step 193SGS243a). When the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is displayed. , Set to hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed for the hold memory that becomes the probability variation big hit C or the small hit.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not the symbol designation command indicating the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the command indicating that the symbol designation command is off. (Step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or non-probabilistic jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the entry is concerned. The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of (step 193SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit and the jackpot type specified in step 193SGS244, the pre-reading advance notice at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is shown. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. ..

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area 193SG5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold memory display is a white star (☆) and the first hold memory display area 193SG5D or the second hold memory display is displayed. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

If the variable display result is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpot C, the pre-reading notice effect may not be decided to be non-executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided as the display pattern (notice type). The display pattern (notice type) of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A", the display pattern α determines the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio to be set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot A is increased, and the player's expectation of becoming the probability variation jackpot A can be increased.

In this feature unit 193SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit" other than the probabilistic big hit C, the hold memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-reading notice effect. The display pattern of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in the white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot C. Even in the case of a "big hit" other than the above, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "missing".

Further, in step 193SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 193SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 193 SGS247, an deviation (not shown) is shown. By referring to the time look-ahead notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 193SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on the 193SG5U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star shape (☆), which is a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold. It is displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area 193SG5U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category. The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than when is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined. The ratio at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is determined by the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”. It is set higher than the ratio to be set.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variation A)" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". Since the ratio of the above is increased, the expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of step 193SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 193SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS249).

After the execution of step 193SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 193SGS249 (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step). 193SGS250), step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). After that, the hold display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is used according to the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A after the shift. The hold display of the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As a display mode of this hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the hold display flag is When it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. Displayed in mode. If the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is two, for example, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. As a mode, for example, the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of “◯”, and the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U in the display mode of “☆”. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved display flag of the reserved storage. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the hold storage display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (in the feature unit 193SG, the center direction of the screen) as the hold memory is reduced (consumed).

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 193SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U.

Although the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 193SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D is not limited to this. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 193SG5U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of the start winning in step 193SGS242, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 193SGS242 If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start prize in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start prize in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 193SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. It is a symbol, and a combination (outlier symbol) other than the above-mentioned chance eyes is determined. Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle symbol is medium. Determine the combination of reach loss (missing symbol) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect during the variable display (step 193SGS277). When the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), the notice effect determination process for the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect). Is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). .. The temporary stop notification effect is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The special temporary stop notification effect is to temporarily stop the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The decorative design is temporarily stopped by updating to the background image according to the number of times (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the number of temporary stops is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third). Is a production that informs the player.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193 SGS281). When the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193SGS281; Y), the process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

When the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. It is determined from 1.5 seconds (step 193SGS283). Then, the process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and the fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

Further, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display (step 193SGS277; N), the notice effect determination process for the variable display that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the variable display is in progress. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed are determined (step 193 SGS285). After deciding whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected by any of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 193SGS288). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 193SGS289). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the effect process is executed during the variable display, and determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer. If the process timer has timed out, the process is switched to the next process data, and the next process is performed again. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by starting the timer and controlling the effect device according to the absence of the next process data. When the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the advance notice effect in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the advance notice effect execution process for executing the advance notice effect in the variable display during effect process. ..

Next, the flow of the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, first, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after reaching the reach. The suggestion temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. The temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG is such that after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Is a production that performs variable display at a lower speed than usual. The length of the temporary stop suggestion effect period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification effect period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

When the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally displayed. The stop is executed and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. If the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing B is reached, and the pseudo stop notification effect is simulated. Temporary stop of the continuous symbol is executed, and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), the temporary stop notification effect period A and the temporary stop notification effect period B have the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification effect has an effect period of 1.5 seconds and 2 Regardless of which of the seconds is determined, it is set to always end at a specific timing.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the revariable display notification effect is executed. In the revariable display notification effect, in addition to outputting the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, an image of a character corresponding to the number of revariable display times on the image display device 5 (character A if the number of revariable display times is the first). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed by displaying the image of the character B for the second time and the image of the character C for the third time.

The first revariable display is executed during the revariable display notification effect. When the revariable display notification effect is completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the revariable display notification effect. In the first variable display start count notification effect, the variable display count of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image of the color corresponding to the variable display count is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. It is a production to display. That is, in the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the first revariable display, "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5, and blue effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the second revariable display, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the third revariable display, "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, and red is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is an effect that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start number notification effect. The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect of displaying the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the revariable display number on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect.

After the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the reach effect of the normal reach is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), when the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display. Similar to the case where the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 11-23 (A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed once during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect after the reach is reached and the first pseudo-ream effect, respectively. Temporary stop and revariable display of the symbol, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, second variable display start number notification effect, and first temporary stop and revariable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again and the second temporary stop and revariable display of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop notification effect, the revariable display notification effect, the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed. Will be done. Then, after the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the reach effect of the super reach is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol.

If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). When the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also set in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). Is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second revariable display notification effect, an image of a character (character B) different from that of the first revariable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the first variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x3" ("x3" having a size smaller than that of the second first variable display start number notification effect in the second second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-25, when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 11- Similar to the case where the variation pattern shown in 23 (B) is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect after reaching the reach and the pseudo-continuous pattern up to the second time, respectively. Temporary stop and revariable display, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, and second variable display start number notification effect are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again, and the third temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop notification effect, the revariable display notification effect, and the third 1 The variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and further, the reach effect of super reach is executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also set during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also performed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). It is executed in 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third revariable display notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of a character (character C) different from the first and second revariable display effects. Further, in the third variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x4" ("x4" having a size smaller than that of the third first variable display start number notification effect in the third second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-26, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, first, the temporary stop is temporarily stopped. Suggestion production is executed.

In the variable display, the temporary stop notification effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. .. That is, in the variable display executed by the special temporary stop notification effect, the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification are different from the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed). The production period is unchanged.

After the end of the special temporary stop notification effect, the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed without executing the revariable display notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect. Further, after a while, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. That is, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, as the first revariable display notification effect, the image of the character (character A) is displayed or as the first variable display start number notification effect. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the image display device 5 as the second variable display start number notification effect has a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect "x2". Is only displayed

Then, after the first temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, special After the temporary stop notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the second variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 11-23 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-27, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIGS. 11-26. Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbols up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, the third decorative symbol is provisionally displayed. The stop and revariable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the third variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 11-23 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x4" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

Although some of them have been described above, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature unit 193SG is a speaker 8L of the temporary stop notification sound from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , It is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting from 8R, and is an effect executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect is the number of temporary stops of the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. By updating to the background image according to the above (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the second is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third), the decorative design is temporarily stopped. It is a production that notifies the player. The special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the update timing to the next special background image or the end of the variable display, while the temporary stop notification. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as a part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is an image of a character corresponding to the number of re-variable display on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (if the re-variable display number is the first time, the character). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed by displaying the image of A (the image of character B for the second time and the image of character C for the third time). The effect period of the revariable display notification effect (the display period of the character image on the image display device 5 and the output period of the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the revariable display is executed. Seconds. As described above, in the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the higher the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (the number of times the temporary stop / re-variable display is executed), the higher the jackpot expectation is set, so that the variable display is re-variable. Regarding the display notification effect, the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when the image of the character C is finally displayed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the image of the character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start number notification effect is for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the revariable display is started as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect, and the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including these revariable displays is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display In the start number notification effect, "x3" is displayed, and in the third variable display start number notification effect, "x4") is displayed. The effect period of the first variable display start number notification effect is 1 second regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the first variable display start number notification effect. , The number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second first variable display start number notification In the production, "x3" is displayed for the third time as well as "x4" in the first variable display start number notification effect) in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification effect. The effect period of the second variable display start number notification effect is 2 seconds regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

FIG. 11-29 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 11-22. In the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193 SGS301). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to execute the pseudo-continuous effect. The production is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 20%. The execution of the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%.

The cut-in notice effect is an effect in which the cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-29 (F), and the group notice effect is an effect shown in FIG. 11-29 (G). As shown, this is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed so as to cross the display area of the image display device 5.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 0%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed as the notice effect (pseudo-ream). Big hit expectation regarding the notice effect in the variable display that executes the effect: Cut-in notice effect + group notice effect> group notice effect> cut-in effect> non-execution).

After the execution of step 193SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect (determines the execution of at least one of the cut-in advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect) (step 193SGS303). When the execution of any of the advance notice effects has not been decided (step 193 SGS303; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) is terminated, and when the execution of any of the advance notice effects is decided (step 193 SGS303; N). Y) stores the determined advance notice effect, sets the advance notice effect start waiting timer, and ends the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

As shown in FIGS. 11-32, the executable period of these advance notice effects overlaps with the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start number notification effect period. In particular, when it is decided to execute both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect as the notice effect, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are taken during the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start count notification effect period. The production is executed in duplicate.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the execution of any of the notice effects is decided in the notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the same notice effect is executed in all the revariable display notification effect periods. (See FIGS. 11-29 to 11-31).

FIG. 11-30 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for non-execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 11-22. In the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193 SGS311). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random number value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed and the advance notice to be executed. The production is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 30%. Will be decided at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the group notice effect will be decided at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice production is decided at a rate of 2%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed (big hit expectation regarding the notice effect in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect: group notice effect> cut-in effect> non-execution).

After the execution of step 193SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 193SGS313). When the execution of the advance notice effect is not decided (step 193SGS313; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect) is ended, and when the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (step 193SGS313; Y), the advance notice effect is determined. The determined advance notice effect is stored, and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to end the advance notice effect determination process (for when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed) (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

When the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, the advance notice effect may be executed in any period during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

FIG. 11-31 (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect in step 193SG280 in FIG. 11-22. In step 193SG280 in FIG. 11-22, if the variable display result is a big hit (super reach big hit), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the special temporary stop notification effect (executes the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20%. It is decided, and the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is off (super reach is off), the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed (execution of the special temporary stop notification effect). (Non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the special temporary stop notification effect is executed in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect (the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern and the image is displayed. When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when only the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol; The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the temporary stop notification effect is executed (the jackpot expectation in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: special temporary stop notification effect execution> special temporary stop notification effect not executed). ..

Further, as described above, paying attention to the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image corresponds to the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The first special background image is only displayed on the display device 5, but when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 responds to the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern. After the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (first special background image). The third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (from the second special background image). (Updated to the 3rd special background image).

That is, with respect to the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of pseudo continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. Therefore, the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is set. Is set to have the highest jackpot expectation when is the third special background image, and the jackpot expectation is lowest when the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image. Big hit expectation for the special background image that is set (in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect) that is finally displayed on the image display device 5: 3rd special background image> 2nd special background image> 1st special background image ).

FIG. 11-31 (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 11-22. In step 193SG283 in FIG. 11-22, if the variable display result is a big hit, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. The temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds) is determined at the ratio of. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification effect period B (1) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). That is, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, if the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is 1. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (the jackpot expectation regarding the production period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect). : Temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds)> Temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds)).

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the temporary stop notification effect period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect period is not limited to this. It may be uniquely determined in one period, or it may be determined from three or more periods.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which a longer temporary stop notification effect period has a higher expectation of a big hit than a shorter temporary stop notification effect period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a shorter temporary stop notification effect period may have a higher expectation of a big hit than a longer temporary stop notification effect period.

Next, the output mode of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the variable display will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R can output BGM (musical music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during variable display excluding the revariable display notification effect period. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a revariable display notification sound, and a first variable display start number notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification effect period, and the revariable display notification sound is output only during the revariable display notification effect period. The 1 variable display start number notification sound is output only during the first variable display start number notification effect period.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a cut-in notice effect sound and a group notice effect sound. Of these, the cut-in notice effect sound is output only during the cut-in notice effect execution period when the execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided, and the group notice effect sound is decided to execute the group notice effect. If so, it is output only during the group notice effect execution period.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the revariable display notification effect period from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the output of the BGM is limited, the output of the BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the revariable display notification effect period. Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the first variable display start number notification effect period, the speakers 8L and 8R output. In addition to the first variable display start count notification sound, a maximum of four types of sounds including BGM, a cut-in notice effect sound, and a group notice effect sound are output.

Next, a display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2 from above to below in the image display device 5. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol toward is executed. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. From the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not drawn as the image data 2, that is, from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol as the image data 2 is hidden.

Further, from the middle of the movement display of the speed V1 of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1. The temporary stop suggestion image is displayed from the middle of the movement display of the speed V1 of the pseudo-continuous symbol described above to the period of the display image data switching timing, but is not displayed (hidden) in other periods.

Further, immediately before the display image data switching timing, the display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the central portion of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3. The pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by the image data 3 does not move until the display image data switching timing (speed 0), but from the display image data switching timing, the speed V1 described above is directed downward from the central portion of the image display device 5. The movement display is performed at a speed V3, which is faster than that. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 is hidden when the pseudo-continuous symbol moves out of the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, from the display image data switching timing, the moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol from the upper side to the lower side in the image display device 5 is executed by drawing with the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3> V2> V1) which is faster than the speed V1 and slower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol continues until the start timing of the reach effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The display of the concentrated line is displayed at D2, which is a higher density than D1, after the density (display density) is displayed at D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to a certain period. That is, the number of concentrated lines to be displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed again at the density D1 from the display image data switching timing and then disappears.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the display image data switching timing, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right") is lower than the state before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect (visibility: high). (Visibility: Medium). Further, as the density of the concentrated lines changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: low).

Further, from the display image data switching timing to the display end timing of the concentrated line, since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher than that when the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2. Higher (visibility: medium). Then, after the display end timing of the concentrated line, the display of the concentrated line is completed (hidden), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is the highest (visibility: high).

As shown in FIGS. 11-34, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2 from the upper side to the lower side in the image display device 5. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol of is executed. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIGS. 11-33 does not temporarily stop. It is the same. Further, after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop notification effect is executed, but during the temporary stop notification effect execution period, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, it becomes hidden.

Further, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. In the display of the concentrated line, the density of the concentrated line (display density) is displayed in D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). , It will be hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The display of the concentrated line is displayed at D2, which is a higher density than D1, after the density (display density) is displayed at D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to a certain period. That is, the number of concentrated lines to be displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is hidden from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the display image data switching timing, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right") is lower than the state before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect (visibility: high). (Visibility: Medium). Further, as the density of the concentrated lines changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: low). Further, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the display of the concentrated line is completed (not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIGS. 11-34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the decorative symbol is drawn by drawing the image data 1. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of is displayed around the pseudo-continuous pattern. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 11-35). The effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 193SG is an image in which the transmittance is set to 0%.

That is, in the temporary stop notification effect period, once the concentrated line is hidden, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher than that in the temporary stop suggestion effect execution period (visibility: medium), but the image display device. The left and right decorative symbols become invisible due to the display of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of 5 (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing at which the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the image data 2 ends, the speed V2 toward the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) of the pseudo-continuous symbol is also drawn by drawing the image data 2. The move display is executed. At this time, since the movement display (enlarged display) of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible again.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 The moving display of the decorative pattern is not executed (variable display).

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-35 to 11-47.

First, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (C), a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display. After that, the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the "left" and "right" to reach the reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from above to below at a speed V1 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of the normal reach that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (D). At speed V2, it moves below the image display device and disappears. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4 and PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (E). At the same time, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (F) and 11-35 (G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (G) and 11-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (I) and 11-36 (J), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (K) to 11-37 (P), the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in notice effect overlaps with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. A group notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the blue effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits blue light.

The "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start number notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5 and then displayed in a larger size and is not displayed. It becomes a display (see FIGS. 11-37 (O) and 11-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, the second movable body 193SG033 ends its blue light emission, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position. Further, as the first second variable display start number notification effect, an image of "x2" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.

After a while after the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (R) to 11-38 (T), the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas After the decorative symbol stopped (swinged stop) in 5L and 5R to reach the reach, the pseudo-continuous symbol was moved from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C as the second temporary stop suggestion effect. It moves at speed V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 out of the normal reach or the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 of the normal reach jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect only once, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (U). The pseudo-continuous symbol moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 without being temporarily stopped and is hidden. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more, FIG. 11-38 (V) As shown in the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (W) and 11-38 (X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the green light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (X) and 11-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of pits explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (Z) and 11-39 (a), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 (b) to 11-40 (h), the second revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the green effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits green light.

The "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification effect is displayed in a larger size after being displayed on the image display device 5 and is not displayed. It becomes a display (see FIG. 11-40 (f) and FIG. 11-40 (g)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the second second variable display start number notification effect, "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

After a while after the second variable display start count notification effect is completed, the decorative symbol display areas of "left" and "right" are shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e) to 11-41 (g). After the decorative symbol stops (swing stops) in 5L and 5R to reach the reach, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C as the third temporary stop suggestion effect. It moves at speed V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a fluctuation pattern PA2-3 out of super reach or a fluctuation pattern PB1-3 of super reach jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect only twice, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (h). In addition, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 without being temporarily stopped and is hidden. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more, FIG. 11-41 (i) As shown in the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (j) and 11-41 (k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the red light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (k) and 11-41 (l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (m) and 11-42 (n), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (o) to 11-43 (u), the third revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the red effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits red light.

The "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third variable display start count notification effect is displayed in a larger size after being displayed on the image display device 5 once. (See FIGS. 11-43 (s) and 11-43 (t)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the third second variable display start number notification effect, "x4" having a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

Here, the time when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-44 (A) and 11-44 (B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol is directed from the upper side to the lower side at the speed V1 in the image display device 5 as described above. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D2. When the pseudo-continuous symbol approaches the temporary stop position as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, the speed V1 is directed from above to below at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative symbol). A pseudo-series symbol (pseudo-series symbol by drawing with image data 3) different from the pseudo-series symbol (pseudo-series symbol drawn with image data 2) that moves in is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-series symbol. NS.

Then, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (C), so that the temporary stop notification is given around the pseudo-ream symbol. The effect image for Lights up in green for a temporary stop and red for the third temporary stop). Further, the concentrated line displayed on the image display device 5 at this time is hidden.

On the other hand, when the decorative symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (D) and 11-44 (E), the pseudo-continuous symbol in the center of the image display device 5 (Pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by image data 2) that has been moving from above to downward at speed V1 is displayed. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2 and moves downward as it is to the image display device 5 to be hidden. At the same time, the normal movement display of the decorative symbol is executed from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 from the timing when the movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V2 is started (the number of concentrated lines displayed decreases). Then, the concentrated line after the density changes to D1 is hidden after a certain period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 11-44 (F) and 11-44 (G), after the concentrated lines are hidden, the decorations excluding the pseudo-continuous symbols are removed for a while in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After the variable display is executed on the symbol, the reach effect according to the variable pattern is executed, and finally the decorative symbol indicating the big hit or the miss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature unit 193SG, "medium"). In the decorative symbol display area 5C, the decorative symbols of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of outliers, are stopped). That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of the concentrated line is continued even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentrated line is displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbol stops due to a combination of big hits or misses (more accurately, before the reach effect is started).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-45, the left and right decorative symbols (“right” and “left” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) The displayed decorative pattern) has lower visibility during the temporary stop suggestion effect period than before the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed because the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 (visibility: low). .. Further, the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "right" and "left") are further reduced in visibility by changing to the density D2 of the concentrated lines (visual recognition). Gender: Medium).

Further, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification effect period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo-continuous symbol from the start timing of the temporary stop notification effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The visibility is higher than that of the temporary stop suggestion effect period during the period (visibility: medium).

After the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification effect period, the remaining temporary stop notification effect period (the player side of the pseudo continuous symbol). (Movement display toward) and revariable display It becomes invisible to the player during the notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start number notification effect, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to the partial overlap of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" displayed in the center of the image display device 5. The visibility is the same as immediately after the start of (Visibility: Medium).

After that, the left and right decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. (moved toward the player side) so that the player cannot see them. After that, the display of these "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to the small display at the upper left part of the image display device 5, so that the state with the highest visibility (visibility: high). It becomes.

In the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 to 11-37, 11-39 to 11-40, and 11-42 to 11-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect is set. Although the mode in which the execution period of the revariable display notification effect is different (the revariable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these provisional display notification effects are tentative. The execution period of the stop notification effect and the execution period of the revariable display notification effect may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 to 11-37, when the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and is moved to the front side in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol ( For example, the character "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the character as a revariable display notification effect on the back side of a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The display of the image of is started. By doing so, the image of the character is gradually made visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the effect of the effect can be improved, and further, the image is displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to transfer the images that are displayed without any discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (H) and the like, the feature unit 193SG displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol has a crack in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, and the image itself explodes. Although the display mode has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image in which the cracks enter and the image in which the explosion occurs may be different. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which a ridge is included in the pseudo-continuous pattern, and then displays an image in which smoke or light is generated from the ridge. Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be difficult to see from the player by the image of the smoke or light, and an exploding image may be displayed instead of the pseudo-continuous symbol. By doing so, it is possible to transfer the image displayed on the image display device 5 without discomfort.

Next, when it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A) to 11-46 (C), the variable display is started for a while. Become a reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at a lower speed (speed V1) than usual in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-effect period ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D) to 11-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the first special background image and the first time. The revariable display of the decorative pattern of is started. At this time, if the execution of the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is decided at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is executed in duplicate with the revariable display notification effect.

Then, when the cut-in effect and the group notice effect are completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start number notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (I) to 11-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the second temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The image is displayed on the second special background image, and the re-variable display of the decorative symbol, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, the second second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and the third decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the third special background image, and the decorative pattern is revariably displayed, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, and the like. The third variable display start number notification effect is executed. Then, the reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. By doing so, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is reduced, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is produced by the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop. Then, as the temporary stop notification effect, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative symbols invisible, so that the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol should have been temporarily stopped, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that there was no such thing, and the player's disappointment about the fact that the pseudo-ream symbol did not temporarily stop can be alleviated, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing of the display image data, and the switching timing of the display image data is displayed. After that, since the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing. That is, after the switching timing of the display image data, by increasing the transparency of the concentrated line, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, and the attention to the background image is increased through the concentrated line. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment that the pseudo-ream pattern did not temporarily stop.

If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, before the decorative symbol of the combination that becomes a big hit or misses together with the left and right decorative symbols is stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Since the concentrated line is hidden in, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the stop of the decorative symbol after the pseudo-continuous symbol has not been temporarily stopped is a temporary stop.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (G) to 11-35 (H), when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and at the same time, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is cracked and explodes (an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol moves toward the player side), the operation of these second movable bodies 193SG033 and the pseudo-continuous symbol The display of the explosion can further impress the player that the pseudo-ream symbol has temporarily stopped.

In particular, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position as a temporary stop notification effect, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are viewed from the front. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the player is informed that the pseudo-ream symbol has been temporarily stopped while preventing the pseudo-ream symbol from becoming difficult for the player to see due to the second movable body 193SG033. Can make an impression.

In addition, in this feature part 193SG, the form in which the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes is illustrated as an example in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is deformed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is deformed, , The pseudo-continuous symbol may change to the shape of a specific figure (for example, a circle or a triangle), or the size of the pseudo-continuous symbol may be different from that before the temporary stop.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first effect position when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the movable body 32 is placed in the first effect position or a position different from the first effect position in addition to or in place of the second movable body 193SG033, and is viewed from the front. May be moved to a position that overlaps with at least a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (F) and 11-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is displayed before the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. Since it is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5.

Further, in the variable display of the feature unit 193SG, it is possible to execute the pseudo-ream effect up to three times, and every time the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and the revariable display is executed as these pseudo-ream effects, the first is performed. As the 1 variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 displays displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" according to the revariable display number. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (O), when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and becomes the second movable body 193SG033. Since some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are overlapped in the front view, "x2", "x3", and so on according to the variable number of display times. It is possible to attract attention to the display such as "x4" and improve the effect of the effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (O), 11-40 (f), and 11-43 (s), when "x2" is displayed as the variable display start number notification effect, the second movable is possible. The first variable display start count is obtained by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green when displaying "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red when displaying "x4". It is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the notification effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the feature unit 193SG, when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", ". Although a form in which a part of the display such as "x3" or "x4" is overlapped in the front view is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect is executed. Occasionally, the display of the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, 11-35, and 11-44, as the temporary stop suggestion performance, a concentrated line is displayed at the central portion of the image display device 5 while displaying a pseudo continuous symbol as the temporary stop suggestion image. Is displayed, so that the display control of the temporary stop suggestion effect by the effect control CPU 120 becomes easy, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (shown in FIG. 11-3). It is possible to prevent the switching from the image data to the image data shown in FIG. 11-4) to be unnatural. In particular, after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves downward from the central portion of the image display device 5, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in advance in the central portion of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion image. By setting the image data, the image data can be switched at the display image data switching timing in a different manner that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the gaming machine of the feature unit 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 is drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4 as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4. The data can be combined and the image can be displayed on the image display device 5. In particular, the pseudo-continuous symbol as a temporarily stopped image is drawn as the image data 1 having the highest display priority, and the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is drawn as the image data 2 having a lower display priority than the image data 1, and is temporarily stopped. Since the concentrated line as the stop suggestion effect is drawn as the image data 4 having the lowest display priority, the decorative symbol or pseudo-continuous symbol during the moving display (variable display), the pseudo-continuous symbol as the temporary stop suggestion image, and the temporary It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the concentrated line as a stop suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (H), 11-36 (I), and 11-36 (J), a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When the display explodes and moves to the front side, the left and right decorative symbols are invisible to the player, while the first variable display start count notification effect is shown as shown in FIG. 11-37 (O). When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, since the left and right decorative symbols are visible to the player, the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect (particularly). The effect of (displaying "x2", etc.) can be enhanced, and the left and right decorative symbols can be visually recognized by the player during the first variable display start count notification effect, so that the revariable display is executed. Can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, a portion in which the pseudo-continuous symbols shown in FIGS. 11-35 (H), 11-36 (I), 11-36 (J), etc. explode and are moved and displayed, and 11-37 (O), The parts where the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" shown in FIGS. 11-37 (P) are moved and displayed are both moved displays (enlarged display) toward the player side. ), Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect by the movement display toward the player side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing is pseudo. Since the moving speed of the continuous symbol is V3, the player decides whether the pseudo continuous symbol is before or after the timing of temporary stop by the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbol (before or after the display image data switching timing). It is possible for the player to easily grasp (whether it will be later).

In this feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the pseudo-ream symbol before the display image data switching timing is the pseudo-ream after the display image data switching timing. It may be faster than the moving speed of the symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is V1, but the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the timing is V2, the player determines whether the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol. Can be easily grasped.

In particular, in this feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35, the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop moves from the upper side to the lower side, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is the player. Since it moves toward the side (front side), the player can more easily understand whether it is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed. Misidentification can be prevented.

It should be noted that the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement directions of the pseudo-linkage symbols are different before and after the pseudo-linkage symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-linkage symbol is simulated. The moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol may be the same before the temporary stop of the continuous symbol and after the temporary stop. Further, if the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is different from the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop, the movement does not have to be toward the player side (front side). good.

In this feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing. Although a slower form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is displayed. The number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing may be different from the number of display frames for displaying. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the effect period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed) and the display image data switching The period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed after the timing may be different. That is, in the present invention, "the moving speed at which the specific effect identification information (pseudo-ream symbol in the feature unit 193SG) moves is different" means that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-ream symbol is different, and the pseudo-ream is different. The period during which the symbol is displayed (the production period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed) is also included.

Although the feature portion 193SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 193SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 (the decorative symbol display area 5C of the “middle”) by displaying the concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although a mode in which the player pays attention to whether or not to temporarily stop is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 11-48 (A) to 11-48 as a modified example 193SG-1. As shown in (D), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous symbol moves toward the center of the image display device 5). ), The concentrated line may be moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can identify that the pseudo-continuous symbol may stop at the central portion of the image display device 5. Therefore, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the game It is possible to make it easier for the person to recognize that the temporary stop was not performed.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED293SG034) is made to emit light is illustrated in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-2, when a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. In the image display device 5, a concentrated line may be displayed in a color corresponding to the number of times the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. For example, the concentrated line is displayed in blue when the first temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in green when the second temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, and the concentrated line is displayed in red when the third temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. .. By doing so, when the second movable body 193SG033 is made to emit light as a temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is emitted in the same color as the concentrated line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect. The effect can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which a cut-in notice effect and a group notice effect can be executed as a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-3, the display mode of the decorative symbol is changed or changed from, for example, the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute an effect that changes the display direction.

In this way, when it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the decorative pattern or changing the direction of the variable display as a notice effect, the first variable display start count notification effect is "x2" or "x". When the display of "3" and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to recognize that the revariable display is executed by executing the advance notice effect.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 executes revariable display without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the player. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is improved. A reduced visibility-inhibiting image (for example, an image of a blast) may be displayed, the visibility-inhibiting image may be hidden, and then revariable display may be executed. By doing so, the visibility-impaired image is displayed before the revariable display is executed, so that it is easy to understand that the revariable display is executed.

Further, a light guide plate which is a transparent plate material and can display the above-mentioned visibility-impairing image by emitting light from the outer peripheral side surface is provided on the front side (image display device) of the image display device 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be provided at a position) between 5 and the player. By doing so, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the visibility-inhibiting image is displayed on the light guide plate, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 is difficult for the player to see, and the player's The impression can be enhanced, and the effect of producing an image with impaired visibility can be enhanced.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is always moved and displayed downward of the image display device 5 and hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, it is simulated. A case may be provided in which the continuous symbols once start moving downward of the image display device 5 and then return to the central portion of the image display device 5 to temporarily stop. In this case, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing and the movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol when returning to the central portion of the image display device 5 after passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 once. By making the speed different, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the pseudo-continuous symbol has passed the central portion of the image display device 5 or has once passed the central portion of the image display device 5. You may.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5, the display of the concentrated line may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice. Although the embodiment in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed is illustrated as in the case of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous effect is performed the maximum number of times during the variable display (if the feature unit 193SG is used). When executed (3 times), the reach effect different from the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit than the reach effect of other super reach) High full rotation reach effect, etc.) may be executed. When the pseudo continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display in this way, the full rotation reach effect is executed without going through the revariable display notification effect after the temporary stop notification effect. good.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as a pseudo-ream effect, a pseudo-ream symbol is displayed in the center (“middle” decorative symbol display area 5C) in a state where the symbols showing the same numerical value on the left and right decorative symbols are stopped (reach state). Although the form of temporary stop is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Further, as described above, as the pseudo-ream effect, a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-ream symbol may be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. As for the form in which a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C as a pseudo-continuous effect, an odd-numbered or even-numbered combination such as "135" or "246", "112" The decorative design may be temporarily stopped by a specific combination such as a combination of so-called misalignment such as "334" or "334".

(Explanation of Feature 225SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature portion 225SG (hereinafter, referred to as the present feature portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this feature unit 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion described above will be omitted.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) for the player.
A display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, an image display device 5) and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific image displayed on the display means is controlled to the advantageous state. The part that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10) and
With
The suggestion effect execution means
A pre-stage effect of moving and displaying the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) to 12-4 (E))
As shown in FIGS. 12-4 (G) to 12-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisional, which is a successful mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the first stage effect is executed. The part to stop) and
After executing the first-stage effect, the second-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (F)), which is a failure mode in which the movement display of the specific image is continued, continues without temporarily stopping. The part that is moved and displayed and hidden) and can be executed,
It is a feature part.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to grasp the success and failure of the suggestion production, and the interest of the suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% are displayed with priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols. The part to be done)
In the first subsequent stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is once difficult to see (for example, shown in FIG. 12-4 (G)). (The part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance is displayed),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (F), if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed. part),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the semi-transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the previous stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed, and the specific image is stopped. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize when the image is displayed, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort at the time of the stop display and emphasize that the stop display is performed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-5 as a modified example 225SG-1, a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has priority over a concentrated line. Displayed part),
When the first second stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is displayed when the first second stage effect is executed, so that the specific image is once difficult to see (for example, FIG. 12-6). As shown in (G), the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second subsequent stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (F), when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect for temporary stop notification is not displayed. The part where the image is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage effect in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed is stopped and displayed. Since it is difficult to see the image when it is stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort at the time of the stopped display and emphasize that the image is stopped and displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-5 as a modified example 225SG-1, a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has priority over a concentrated line. Displayed part),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image even before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-7 (F) to 12-7 (H) as a modified example 225SG-2, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after it is hidden by the device 5),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage effect in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed is stopped and displayed. (2) Also in the latter stage production, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode to a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% have priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols. Displayed part),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image even before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) to 12-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving the pseudo-continuous symbol. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after it is hidden by the display device 5),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the semi-transparent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed. Also in the second latter stage production, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode to a predetermined period after the specific image is erased.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent and highly transparent highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% are decorative patterns or pseudo-reams. The part that is displayed with priority over the design),
In the first subsequent stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transparency effect display having a lower transparency than the high-transparency effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-9 as a modified example 225SG-4, the decorative symbol or the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 20% on the image display device 5. The part that is difficult for the player to see),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. Is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the previous stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed, and the specific image is stopped. By displaying the low-transparency effect display when it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort at the time of the stop display and emphasize that the stop display is displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
The first second-stage effect includes an effect in which the size of the specific image is enlarged beyond the size in the first-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. If you do, the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 6, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the stopped display specific image can be improved, and the stopped display can be further emphasized.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the pre-stage effect increases with the progress of the pre-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) to 12-4 (E), the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. The concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the above),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 7, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the expectation that the specific image is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the previous stage production.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
It is provided with a notice effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific event will occur.
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first second stage effect and the second second stage effect, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (for example, as a modification 225SG-5, an image display device as a temporary stop notification effect). When the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in 5, the part that restricts the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 8, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect) is displayed on the display means, and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the front stage effect and the above. The first suggestion effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-11 (C) as the modified example 225SG-5) and the display means have a smaller display dimension than the first specific image. A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) as an active display change suggestion effect) is displayed, and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the first stage effect and the first stage effect. 2 It is possible to execute the second suggestion effect (for example, the active display change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 12-11 (D) to 12-11 (F) as the modified example 225SG-5) in which the latter stage effect is performed.
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the first suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11 (B), in the image display device 5 A part that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% along with an image as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect),
When the first subsequent effect is executed as the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 12-11 (D) to 12-11 (F)). As shown in the above, the image display device 5 displays an arrow image as an active display change notice effect, but does not display an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0%).
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 9, characterized in that.
According to this feature, in the second suggestion effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed when the first subsequent effect is executed, so that the second specific image having a small display dimension can be understood by the effect display. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult.

First, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0%, depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A) to 12-1 (C), 12-2 (A) to 12-2 (C), and 12-3 (A) to 12-3 (C). In addition, for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 12-1 shows image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG, and FIG. 12-2 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Yes, FIG. 12-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image).

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), the image data 2 is obtained from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. It is the data drawn to display the concentrated line toward.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B), 12-2 (B), and 12-3 (A), the image data 3 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is data drawn to display the movement display from the upper side to the lower side. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the left and right of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop). The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b. As shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), the horizontal width dimension of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a), and the vertical width dimension is y. The data is drawn for display in (y> b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 replaces the pseudo-continuous symbol with the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in the feature unit 225SG) from the upper side to the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), the image data 4 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 2 is changed to the image based on the image data 3 (from above to below the pseudo-continuous symbol). It is displayed with priority over (moving display toward). Since the concentrated line in the feature unit 225SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player can draw a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D), the image based on the image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is the image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on (a pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). The effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the revariable display.

The transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D), the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of the decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) Is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern image display device 5 downward).

In particular, in the feature unit 225SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 12-1 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop (see FIGS. 11-33 of the above-mentioned feature unit 193). The image data displayed in 1 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2) in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 12-3 does not temporarily stop.

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (A) to 12-4 (C), after a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display, the decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swing stops) and reaches. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle". At this time, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) to 12-4 (E), in the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (G) and 12-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped by Since it is continuously moved and displayed downward of the display device 5 and then hidden, the player succeeds in producing the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) and fails in the effect (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ) Is easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays a concentrated line having a high transmittance, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol that is moving and displayed temporarily stops. You can improve your interest. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of the temporary stop is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, since the left-right width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a) and the vertical width dimension is y (y> b)), the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved, and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved. The temporary stop can be emphasized more.

The feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing for displaying the size of the pseudo-pseudo-continuous symbol larger than that before the temporary stop is after the temporary stop, such as the timing immediately before the temporary stop or the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and emphasizes that, for example, the pseudo-linkage symbol is temporarily stopped by changing the shape and color of the pseudo-linkage symbol from the timing when the pseudo-linkage symbol is temporarily stopped. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) to 12-4 (E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. By moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is increased, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to raise the expectation for the movie and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In the feature unit 225SG, the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the concentrated lines is changed and the number of concentrated lines to be displayed is increased according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (increasing the density of the concentrated lines). ) By doing so, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the feature portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the image display device 5 draws a concentrated line as the image data 2 and draws a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 3. Although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 12-5 (A) to 12 as a modified example 225SG-1. As shown in −5 (C), by drawing the concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol with priority over the concentrated line (the concentrated line is displayed as a decorative symbol or the like). It may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo-continuous pattern).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A) to 12-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line in the image display device 5 is centered on the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the concentrated line makes it difficult for the player to see the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol. You can prevent that.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as an effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (G) and 12-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced and the temporary stop can be performed. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is hidden and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the image display device. Although the embodiment in which the image is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 12-7 (A) to 12-7 (FIGS. 12-7) to FIG. 12-7 as a modified example 225SG-2. As shown in H), if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device and hidden without being temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period up to the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modified example 225SG-1, the concentrated line is displayed as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, thereby suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-2, the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed with priority over the concentrated line during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 12-8 (A) to 12-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol during the temporary stop suggestion effect. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing so, as with the feature portion 225SG, by displaying the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Can improve the interest of. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily visually recognized. Although the impossible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. 12-9 (A) to 12-9 (C), a pseudo-continuous pattern is used. When is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20% or the like) than the concentrated line.

That is, as shown in FIG. 12-10, the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, during the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the concentrated line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (for example). , The above-mentioned 50%) allows the player to easily see the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line, while the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period (50%). In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% described above), so that the player can display the decorative symbol or pseudo in the period after the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern.

By doing so, as in the case of the feature portion 225SG, a concentrated line having a relatively high transmittance is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, which suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Can improve the interest of. Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 is used when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature unit 225SG. By displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of, the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped through the effect image for the temporary stop notification. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the pseudo-ream pattern temporarily stopping.

Further, the feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as an effect related to the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect (see FIG. 11-29 in the feature unit 193SG) suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit may be executed. .. It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the effect image for temporary stop notification on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. In some cases, by limiting the execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

Further, as the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 12-11 as the modified example 225SG-5, for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the following Pseudo-ream suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the pseudo-ream suggestion effect, and variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F for displaying the hold storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display is provided, and an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the active display and the active display are displayed. It may be possible to execute an active display change notice effect that suggests that the display mode changes.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-11 (A) to 12-11 (C), the pseudo-ream symbol is used as the effect result of the temporary stop notice effect. Displays an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop, and a temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% in the image display device 5. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop. That is, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is started from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is visible to the player only by the effect image for the temporary stop notification. This is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally as shown in FIGS. 12-11 (A) and 12-11 (D) to 12-11 (F). The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the stop timing, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right portion of the image display device 5 pierces the active display as shown in FIG. 12-11 (E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and when the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 12-11 (F), the image display device 5 It is sufficient that the arrow flying from the right portion passes toward the left portion of the image display device 5 without being stuck in the active display and then disappears.

As described above, in the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the effect image for temporary stop notification together with the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect. When the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect while the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is once made invisible to the player, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) whose display dimension is shorter than the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect as the image of the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the effect image for temporary stop notification. It is possible to prevent the image from being obscured.

In the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop advance notice effect, and is simulated at the upper part of the image display device 5. An example is illustrated in which an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmission rate of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transparency is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect at the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transparency is not 0%). An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

(Explanation of Feature 225SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature portion 225SG (hereinafter, referred to as the present feature portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this feature unit 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion described above will be omitted.

First, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0%, depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A) to 12-1 (C), 12-2 (A) to 12-2 (C), and 12-3 (A) to 12-3 (C). In addition, for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 12-1 shows image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG, and FIG. 12-2 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Yes, FIG. 12-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image).

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), the image data 2 is obtained from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. It is the data drawn to display the concentrated line toward.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B), 12-2 (B), and 12-3 (A), the image data 3 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is data drawn to display the movement display from the upper side to the lower side. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the left and right of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop). The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b. As shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), the horizontal width dimension of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a), and the vertical width dimension is y. The data is drawn for display in (y> b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 replaces the pseudo-continuous symbol with the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in the feature unit 225SG) from the upper side to the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), the image data 4 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 2 is changed to the image based on the image data 3 (from above to below the pseudo-continuous symbol). It is displayed with priority over (moving display toward). Since the concentrated line in the feature unit 225SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player can draw a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D), the image based on the image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is the image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on (a pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). The effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the revariable display.

The transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D), the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of the decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) Is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern image display device 5 downward).

In particular, in the feature unit 225SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 12-1 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop (see FIGS. 11-33 of the above-mentioned feature unit 193). The image data displayed in 1 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2) in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 12-3 does not temporarily stop.

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (A) to 12-4 (C), after a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display, the decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swing stops) and reaches. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle". At this time, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) to 12-4 (E), in the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (G) and 12-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped by Since it is continuously moved and displayed downward of the display device 5 and then hidden, the player succeeds in producing the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) and fails in the effect (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ) Is easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays a concentrated line having a high transmittance, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol that is moving and displayed temporarily stops. You can improve your interest. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of the temporary stop is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, since the left-right width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a) and the vertical width dimension is y (y> b)), the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved, and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved. The temporary stop can be emphasized more.

The feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing for displaying the size of the pseudo-pseudo-continuous symbol larger than that before the temporary stop is after the temporary stop, such as the timing immediately before the temporary stop or the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and emphasizes that, for example, the pseudo-linkage symbol is temporarily stopped by changing the shape and color of the pseudo-linkage symbol from the timing when the pseudo-linkage symbol is temporarily stopped. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) to 12-4 (E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. By moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is increased, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to raise the expectation for the movie and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In the feature unit 225SG, the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the concentrated lines is changed and the number of concentrated lines to be displayed is increased according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (increasing the density of the concentrated lines). ) By doing so, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the feature portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the image display device 5 draws a concentrated line as the image data 2 and draws a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 3. Although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 12-5 (A) to 12 as a modified example 225SG-1. As shown in −5 (C), by drawing the concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol with priority over the concentrated line (the concentrated line is displayed as a decorative symbol or the like). It may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo-continuous pattern).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A) to 12-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line in the image display device 5 is centered on the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the concentrated line makes it difficult for the player to see the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol. You can prevent that.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as an effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (G) and 12-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced and the temporary stop can be performed. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is hidden and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the image display device. Although the embodiment in which the image is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 12-7 (A) to 12-7 (FIGS. 12-7) to FIG. 12-7 as a modified example 225SG-2. As shown in H), if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device and hidden without being temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period up to the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modified example 225SG-1, the concentrated line is displayed as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, thereby suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-2, the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed with priority over the concentrated line during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 12-8 (A) to 12-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol during the temporary stop suggestion effect. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing so, as with the feature portion 225SG, by displaying the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Can improve the interest of. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily visually recognized. Although the impossible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. 12-9 (A) to 12-9 (C), a pseudo-continuous pattern is used. When is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20% or the like) than the concentrated line.

That is, as shown in FIG. 12-10, the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, during the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the concentrated line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (for example). , The above-mentioned 50%) allows the player to easily see the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line, while the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period (50%). In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% described above), so that the player can display the decorative symbol or pseudo in the period after the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern. Although not particularly shown in this modification 225SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 notifies the temporary stop as in the case of other feature parts and the modified example. The effect image for is not displayed.

By doing so, as in the case of the feature portion 225SG, a concentrated line having a relatively high transmittance is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, which suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Can improve the interest of. Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 is used when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature unit 225SG. By displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of, the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped through the effect image for the temporary stop notification. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the pseudo-ream pattern temporarily stopping.

Further, the feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as an effect related to the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 225SG-5, a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect during the variable display (see FIG. 11-29 in the feature unit 193SG). ) May be executable. It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the effect image for temporary stop notification on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. In some cases, by limiting the execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

Further, as the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 12-11 as the modified example 225SG-5, for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the following Pseudo-ream suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the pseudo-ream suggestion effect, and variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F for displaying the hold storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display is provided, and an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the active display and the active display are displayed. It may be possible to execute an active display change notice effect that suggests that the display mode changes.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-11 (A) to 12-11 (C), the pseudo-ream symbol is used as the effect result of the temporary stop notice effect. Displays an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop, and a temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% in the image display device 5. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop. That is, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is started from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is visible to the player only by the effect image for the temporary stop notification. This is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally as shown in FIGS. 12-11 (A) and 12-11 (D) to 12-11 (F). The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the stop timing, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right portion of the image display device 5 pierces the active display as shown in FIG. 12-11 (E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and when the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 12-11 (F), the image display device 5 It is sufficient that the arrow flying from the right portion passes toward the left portion of the image display device 5 without being stuck in the active display and then disappears.

As described above, in the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the effect image for temporary stop notification together with the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect. When the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect while the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is once made invisible to the player, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) whose display dimension is shorter than the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect as the image of the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the effect image for temporary stop notification. It is possible to prevent the image from being obscured.

In the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop advance notice effect, and is simulated at the upper part of the image display device 5. An example is illustrated in which an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmission rate of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transparency is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect at the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transparency is not 0%). An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of the plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. Although the mode in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by changing the display mode of the hold storage display or the display mode at the end timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a hold memory display change effect that suggests that the variable display result corresponding to the hold memory display is a big hit, and as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. , A case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the hold storage display is changed (hold memory display change notification symbol) is stopped in the image display device 5. When the hold memory display change notification symbol is stopped in the image display device 5 in this way, the temporary stop suggestion in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG is targeted for whether or not the hold memory display change notification symbol is stopped. An effect corresponding to the effect (suggested effect in the present invention) may be made feasible.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of the plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. The form in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of images can be displayed as a background image in the image display device 5 and displayed. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result being executed to be a big hit according to the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. A case may be provided in which the symbol (background image change notification symbol) indicating that the image is to be stopped is stopped in the image display device 5. When the background image change notification symbol is stopped in the image display device 5 in this way, it is used as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, depending on whether or not the background image change notification symbol is stopped. The corresponding effect (suggested effect in the present invention) may be feasible.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

Further, in the present specification, a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are illustrated as the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. Alternatively, only one feature portion or modification may be carried out.

For example, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that a pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. Although the mode in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by a combination of decorative symbols (stop symbol). An effect (suggestion effect in the present invention) corresponding to the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG is executed for the stop of the symbol that can be suggested and suggests that a specific set value is set. It may be possible.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and also includes a plurality of types of effect identification including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols). Information (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to derive and display the display result, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled in a manner (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and as a variable display, the specific effect identification information is displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. Specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that temporarily stops and then resumes the variable display). And, the suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped. The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped is shown in FIG. A game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-17), which can control a state control means (for example, a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (the part where the effect processing is executed during the variable display). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion for executing step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the suggestion effect execution means is provided with the suggestion effect execution means. As a result, the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is once lowered to the first low visibility state by the display of the effect display, and then the visibility is further lower than that of the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of reducing the visibility to a low level (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34, the left and right decorative views are displayed by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5. After reducing the visibility of the pattern, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D2 to further reduce the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols)), the notification effect executing means is the specific effect as the notification effect. Effect that is different from the identification information It is possible to execute an effect that makes the identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35, the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. The left and right decorative symbols are invisible by displaying the entire area), and the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped. If it does not stop, the effect display can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol. If not, the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5), and the effect display is after the predetermined timing and before the predetermined timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing of the display image data. Since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 after the display image data switching timing, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is more visible after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing. The state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied because the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, a step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS170, the part where step 100IWS173 is executed), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (the variable display of the second identification information is executed). For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a game machine (a part for executing step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. When the temporary stop is not performed, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player for the fact that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since it becomes possible to alleviate the disappointment of the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the transparency of the effect display is increased after the predetermined timing at which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, so that the player is made aware that the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and the effect display is easy to visually recognize. By increasing the attention to the background image, the player's disappointment that the specific effect identification information did not temporarily stop can be alleviated. In addition, the relief of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

That is, even if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed, so that the suggestive effect is strongly impressed on the player by the afterglow of the effect display. This makes it possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player as compared with the case where the effect display is terminated immediately after the predetermined timing has passed, and the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the second identification information is variable. Since the numerical information is updated depending on when the display is executed, for example, the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Since the numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than in the case, the motivation of the game can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily attract the interest of the player when installed in the amusement park and can improve the player's motivation to play.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention also executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and also displays a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) in a variable manner. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. In the machine 1), as a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is used at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. ) Is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display is resumed. The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the specific effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped is a variable display effect shown in FIG. A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped is shown in FIG. A game (as shown in FIG. 16-17, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17), which can control a state control means (for example, a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (the part where the effect processing is executed during the variable display). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion for executing step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the suggestion effect execution means is provided with the suggestion effect execution means. By displaying the effect display, the visibility of the effect identification information is once lowered to the first low visibility state, and then lowered to the second low visibility state, which is even lower in visibility than the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34, after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5 , (A portion that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2), the notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect. Yes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 and 11-35, a portion in which the left and right decorative symbols are invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5). The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The concentrated line is continuously displayed), and the effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33). When the continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the display image data switching timing, and the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 after the display image data switching timing. Therefore, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing), and the state control means is the numerical information updated by the updating means. However, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-13, for game control. A portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, and a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173), the updating means is the first identification. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-13, a step in the game control microcomputer 100. A game machine (a part that executes 100 IWS71) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. When the temporary stop is not performed, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player for the fact that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since it becomes possible to alleviate the disappointment of the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the transparency of the effect display is increased after the predetermined timing at which the special identification information is temporarily stopped, so that the player is made aware that the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and the effect display is transparent to facilitate visual recognition. By increasing the attention to the background image, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment that the special identification information did not temporarily stop. In addition, the relief of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In other words, even if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed, so that the suggestive effect is strongly impressed on the player by the afterglow of the effect display. This makes it possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player compared to the case where the effect display is terminated immediately after the predetermined timing has passed, and the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Since the numerical information is updated depending on the case where is executed, for example, when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated. Since the numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued, the motivation for the game can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily attract the interest of the player when installed in the amusement park and can improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of the game and can suitably realize the relief of the player, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and specified. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) when a display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, and is a special state (for example) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17, a portion in which step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, a game as shown in FIG. 16-19. A part of the control computer 100 that executes step 100 IWS537) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the game control microcomputer). The special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control computer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, in the game control computer 100. (Part of executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S905). In step S905, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is enabled (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Explanation of feature 108IW)
Next, the feature portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state (also controlled in the time saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will be hit by a normal figure in a normal figure game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased as compared with the normal state and the time saving state. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the probabilistic change state or the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on what has been done.

Further, in this example, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after the big hit occurs, after the time reduction occurs, and after the relief time reduction occurs, the next big hit Even if the time reduction does not occur, it may be controlled to the time reduction state (relief time reduction).

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of the following (1) to (4) may be controlled may differ between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, in a low base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be 1/1, or the probability of hitting a normal figure may be extremely low and the probability of hitting a normal figure may be substantially 1/1. That is, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control of the above (1) is not performed, a part or all of the above (2) to (4) are controlled so that the high base state is obtained. You may.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are defined as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, in the case of the set value "6" having the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time reductions N is 108 to. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time reductions N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and even when they are set to any of the set values, the above provisions are satisfied.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-1 to 16-47.

(Board composition)
FIG. 16-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 108IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, in addition to the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 16-1, a right-handed LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal drawing hold indicator 25C. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 16-1, a right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-1, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left side and the right side of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the two LEDs are alternately turned on and off to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol. NS.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, instead of the passing gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a passing game ball can pass to the right side of the image display device 5. A gate 100 IW41 is provided. In the feature unit 108IW, the normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 100IW41. Therefore, in the feature unit 108IW, since the probability of hitting a normal figure increases in the probability variation state or the time saving state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the main feature unit 108IW, in the normal state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Big hit probability, time saving loss probability)
16-2 and 16-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 16-2 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 16-3 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 16-2 (A) and 16-3 (A), the non-probability change state (low) is performed both when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536" (about 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "242/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/270), which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 (B) and 16-3 (B), the probability variation state (in both the case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest (about 1/32) with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2420/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/27), which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the probabilistic state as compared with the non-probability state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-2, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). Further, as shown in FIG. 16-3, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "328/65536" (about 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time reduction is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3, even when the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value as described above and the time reduction probability is set to be constant, no time reduction is lost. By making the probabilities different for the set values "1" to "6", the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured to be controllable to a small hit game state. When the small hit is also determinable, for example, the small hit probability may be constant regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6".

Further, when the small hit is also configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a small hit with a time reduction that is controlled to a time reduction state triggered by the small hit.

The examples shown in FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3 are examples, and various modes can be considered as methods for setting the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol. When the display is executed, the case where the time saving loss probability is about 1/200 is shown, but conversely, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/200. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the time saving loss probability may be configured to be about 1/400.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 16-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 16-4 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 16-4 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished or the next big hit occurs.

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

The "sudden probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot", 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of games in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game. The large winning opening is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the large winning opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (hence, a short period of time for the jackpot). Opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", it is practically impossible to expect a prize in the big prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the player suddenly changed to the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 16-4 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, and 40%. It is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" with a probability, and is determined to be a "sudden change jackpot" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, 55. With a% probability, it is determined as a "probability change jackpot", and with a 5% probability, it is determined as a "sudden change jackpot".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 16-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 16-5 (A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 16-5 (B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 16-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIGS. 16-5 (A) and 16-5, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time reduction is lost, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case of loss, there is a 1/3 chance that it will be determined as "time saving loss A", a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time saving loss B", and a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time saving loss C". Is decided.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-5, various modes can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be out of time, the probability of determining "time reduction out of C" is increased, while when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be out of time, "time reduction is out". The determination ratio of the time saving type may be different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as increasing the determination probability of "missing A".

Further, for example, in the case where the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, the time reduction counter or the like may be uniformly configured so as not to be overwritten even if the time reduction is lost, or the time reduction deviation symbol may be configured. Depending on the type, the time reduction counter or the like may be overwritten or not overwritten.

FIG. 16-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 16-6, in this example, in the normal state, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 times when the time reduction is out of A, and the time reduction is 50 times when the time reduction is out of B. It is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times, and when it becomes "time saving out of C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times. Further, in the time saving state, when "time saving loss A" occurs, the time saving state is controlled until the next big hit, and when "time saving loss B" occurs, the time saving state is controlled to 200 times, and "time saving loss". When it becomes "C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving. Further, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as will be described later, the time reduction may not be determined in the probabilistic state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where the time reduction is determined to be out of time even in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. Further, in this example, as will be described later, if a big hit does not occur even after finishing the variation display of 800 times after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times by the relief time saving, the relief time is shortened again. It is controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to the relief time reduction is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. The relief time reduction arrival rate is the rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by fluctuating n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.
K = (1-ML) n = {(P-1) ÷ P} n
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = Big hit probability ML denominator, n = Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction deviation is not limited to that shown in FIG. 16-6. For example, even when the same time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control so that the number of time-savings is 100 times in the normal state and the time-saving state. Further, for example, even when the same time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving number is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the time saving number is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is,). It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case where the time reduction is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
16-7 and 16-8 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 108IW. Of these, FIG. 16-7 (A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big hits. Further, FIG. 16-7 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 16-7 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 16-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the time saving state, which is controlled via the time saving time loss.

Further, FIG. 16-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 16-8 (F) and 16-8 (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for deviation within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 16-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. Further, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 16-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 16-8 (H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for deviation in the probabilistic state. However, in this example, even in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 16-8 (I) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table I for removing the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 16-8 (J) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table J for the jackpot of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PB2. It is determined to be one of -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (C), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), It is determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

As shown in FIGS. 16-7 (C), 16-7 (D), and 16-8 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation are observed in the time-saving state. The rate at which the pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 as compared with the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is as high as 99%, which is the same as in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation or the jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit does not occur for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened fluctuation) increases the rate at which the fluctuation display is executed, and shortens the period until the next big hit is controlled, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-7 (C), 16-7 (D), and 16-8 (E), in this example, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is compared with that of this example. The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Further, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. ) Will not be determined and super reach will not be performed. That is, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of the loss, and the average fluctuation time becomes shorter. There is. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. In this example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach is not executed at the time of disconnection, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach will be missed. Since the ratio of becoming is low, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (F), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher. Further, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (G), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-8 (F) and 16-8 (G), if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 It is not determined to be (super reach β), and super reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not obtained. In addition, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the rate is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 16-7 (C)). At the time of disconnection, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (H), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 16-8 (H), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the average fluctuation time is further averaged than in the time-shortened state. Is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (I), in this example, the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened, and if it is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing out). NS. That is, the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing off) is a variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the variation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the variation display (disappearance) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (rushing off), as will be described later, a time saving rushing effect (for example, a time saving rushing effect) for notifying that the fluctuation pattern is controlled to the time saving state (that is, the relief time saving) is performed. (See FIGS. 16-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to be shortened, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (J), in this example, if the relief time is shortened and the jackpot is missed, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing pretending jackpot) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Will be done. That is, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the fluctuation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the fluctuation display (big hit) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing pretending big hit) is determined, a time saving rushing effect (for example, FIG. 16) for notifying that the time saving state (that is, relief time saving) is controlled is performed, as will be described later. -38 (G), (H)) and the same mode of effect (see, for example, FIG. 16-41 (G')), and then an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur (for example, FIG. 16-41). (See (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

The method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 16-7 and 16-8 is an example, and various modes can be considered. For example, when the time reduction state occurs and the time reduction state is controlled again during the time reduction state, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the time reduction state controlled via the jackpot shown in FIG. 16-7 (C). The table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next big hit among the cases where the time saving is lost (in this example, when the time saving is lost A during the time saving state), via the big hit shown in FIG. 16-7 (C). The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled by.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E), the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the extremely shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high during the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of feasible advance notice effects and look-ahead advance notice effects. For example, in the case of a time saving state via the relief time saving, an effect of displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, an effect of turning on a lamp or an LED, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect. An effect that outputs different fluctuating stop sounds is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is provided, but the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is not provided, for example, via the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 16-7 (C)) in the time saving state.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case of switching to the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 16-8 (F) and (G)) is shown. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the number of divisions such as 100 or 200 remaining fluctuations. Only in the case of, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested.

Further, in this example, different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation time is different) depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the missed time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the missed time saving. However, the average fluctuation time may be long.

(Direction control command)
16-9 and 16-10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 16-9 and 16-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is out of line (no time reduction). be.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time saving A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time saving B designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time reduction deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time saving C designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving out of time C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command as the probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden probability change jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly changed to the probability change jackpot. ..

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, the value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, the command is transmitted. The command 957E (H) is transmitted as a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and the command is uniformly designated as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is transmitted to.

The command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times 2, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, the command is transmitted. The command 9608 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration) that specifies the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration is set with a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the time for relief is shortened and transmitted. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, the command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in 1-time units up to 126 times, and in the case of 127 or more remaining times, it can be specified in 100-time units. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the two commands can be identifiable and transmitted in units of one time.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state specification command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state at the time of relief time reduction. The command E004 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) for designating the start of right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of right-handed notification.

The command F000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies to start displaying the customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the hold storage is not stored (that is, when the total number of hold storages is 0) at the end of the symbol confirmation period and the end of the jackpot game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted regardless of whether the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when shifting to the setting change mode for executing the setting change process or the setting confirmation mode for executing the setting confirmation process, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode is completed, and then a customer waiting demo is specified. The command is sent. When the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer is not executing the big hit game, the small hit game, or the special figure game, and the hold memory is not stored. The wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, the relief time saving function is activated when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning. Start the telop display indicating that it is installed (in this example, it is determined whether or not to display the telop by lottery). In addition, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving another command after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the demonstration movie is played.

The command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value designation command) for designating a set setting value. A value corresponding to the set value is set in "XX".

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 16-9 and 16-10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16-9 and 16-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 16-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Control is performed so that a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set and a recovery relief time reduction specification command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9701 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9708 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time is shortened. The number of fluctuations is notified. Further, the relief time can be shortened by executing the variable display based on the hold memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the hold memory stored before the power failure). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player when a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold memory corresponding to the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is stored before the power failure.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100 IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and then the jackpot and the time reduction are not generated even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is established. Will be controlled by. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such a mode. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating that the time saving state is executed, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time saving state, and the hold storage are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state where the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day is continued, so that the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, it is possible to prevent the relief time reduction counter from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the RAM is configured so that the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Special design normal processing)
16-12 and 16-13 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 100 IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In the feature unit 108IW, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It is a program. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is not set (if the probability variation state is low), the CPU 103 has a jackpot determination value for low probability (FIGS. 16-2 (A) and 16-3). (See (A)) is used to make a jackpot determination. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the high probability state), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 16-2 (B) and 16-3 (B)). Make a big hit judgment. When the value of the hit determination random number matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 16-2 and 16-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display in the time reduction state is 0. (Step 100 IWS66). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction state ends at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the count processing of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. I can't be limited. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100 IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "800" in the time reduction counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened. Further, it may be configured to set "901", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. .. Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and issues the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 100IWS75). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and commands 957F as a relief time reduction 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS76). Next, in the CPU 103, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is the number of times in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and directs and controls the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9608 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79.

In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction and transmits the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect described later.

Further, for example, as will be described later, the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and in a configuration in which the relief time reduction can be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is set to the first time. It is configured to send the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command only when the relief time is reduced, and when the relief time is shortened after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command are transmitted. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time is shortened via the relief time reduction, the time reduction is not determined as it is without performing the subsequent time reduction determination processing of step 100IWS81. It is decided to.

In addition to the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving state may be uniformly determined not to be determined as the time saving state during the time saving state including the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. That is, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the time saving deviation determination process after step 100 IWS81 is uniformly prevented, and there is no time saving as it is. You may decide to make it out of the question.

Further, conversely, even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the processing after step 100IWS81 may be executed so that the time saving deviation can be determined. Further, the same variation display may be configured so that both the relief time reduction and the time reduction deviation may occur. In this case, for example, it may be configured to give priority to the relief time reduction and control it to the time reduction state, or it may be configured to control the time reduction state to give priority to the time reduction deviation.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, the time saving state via the relief time saving is not set), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS80, it is determined that, in the case of the probability change state, the process of step 100 IWS 81 and subsequent step 100 IWS 81 is not performed, and the process of step 100 IWS 81 is performed as it is. NS.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses a time reduction loss determination table for determining whether or not the time reduction is lost, and a lottery process based on the time reduction deviation determination random number is used. (Step 100 IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400. (See FIG. 16-2). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200 (). See Figure 16-3).

When it is determined to be out of time (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 uses the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (out of time A or out of time). B, time saving loss C) is determined as the type of time saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time saving type determination is performed using the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65 and the common type determination random number. Furthermore, when the small hit type is also determined and the small hit type is also determined, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the large hit type determination and the time saving type determination. It may be configured to perform the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided and suddenly it is decided to make a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "2". If it is decided and it is decided to set the time saving out of B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "6". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 16-14 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the variation display is a relief time reduction and a big hit is obtained), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 16-8 (J) as a table for determining the variation pattern. ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1701B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 16-7 (A) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702). ..

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, the variation display that shortens the relief time and the relief time is out of order), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 16-8 (I) as a table for determining the variation pattern. ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), the CPU 103 has a total hold storage counter value of 3 or less. Check if it is. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter or the second hold storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 16-8 (F). The variation pattern table F of (step 100IWS1705) is selected. If the value of the total pending storage counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 16-8 (G). The variation pattern table G of (step 100IWS1706) is selected.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 16-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 16-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 16-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715, and the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 16-7 and 16-8 is used is determined (step 100 IWS1716). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 16-15 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type determination result, and the time saving type if it has not been transmitted yet. Based on the determination result of, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time is out of time, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (that is, in the time reduction state), the CPU 103 measures the symbol confirmation period for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1133, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5". A value corresponding to "seconds" is set (step 100 IWS1137). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). .. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
16-16 and 16-17 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop process is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability change flag, the time reduction flag A, the time reduction flag B, the time reduction flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variation display during the probability change state. The probability variation counter and the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 100 IWS135, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit to make an initial setting. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 100 IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time saving number counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time reduction state is controlled to 800 times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processes of steps 100 IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time reduction state is controlled with the relief time reduction as an opportunity, after that, the variation display is executed 800 times without a big hit or a time reduction loss. With this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. After that, if the next big hit or time reduction does not occur even after executing the fluctuation display 800 times, the second relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is controlled. In this example, the time reduction does not occur in the time reduction state triggered by the relief time reduction, but it may occur and the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ) May be done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variation counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation counter (step 100IWS147) and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability change counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability change state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS153.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS141 to S152, the time saving final variation and the probability variation final variation shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variation final fluctuation, the right-handed notification may be terminated by shifting to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

Further, in this example, the case where the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is also terminated in the probabilistic final variation is shown, but not limited to such a mode, only the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is continued. It may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is the case where the time reduction is decided (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time saving number counter if it is out of time saving A (Y in step 100IWS155). (Step 100 IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "30" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving is out of A (Y in step 100 IWS160). Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "200" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS162) (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the time reduction loss, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the time reduction deviation, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction deviation occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image can be switched according to the time saving state via the time saving deviation.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction counter to "800". Is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS90174).

In this example, the relief time can be continuously generated by controlling the time reduction state at the timing when the relief time is shortened and setting the relief time reduction counter ("800" is set). Once the time reduction occurs, it is configured to continue the time reduction state until a big hit occurs, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing when the relief time is shortened, the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction counter is set at the timing when the fluctuation display of 800 times is finished and the normal state is controlled. (See step 100 IWS 144).

Further, in this example, "800" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "800". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a reduction in relief time.

Further, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds longer than usual is set as the symbol confirmation period to secure an effect period such as a mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, but only the small symbol may be displayed so that the small symbol is not concealed by the director or the like.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time reduction counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be configured to be set in the time reduction counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 16-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 16-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and the time saving state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period that is out of time. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game is shifted to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the time may be shortened. Therefore, if a symbol that is out of the variable display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal is displayed at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output is started.

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably discriminate the type of the time reduction even during the time reduction state.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 16-19 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and controls the transmission of the jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 100IWS534), and performs the process. finish.

In step 100 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Whether or not it is a normal big hit can be determined by checking, for example, the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state A designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls the probability variation state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the probability variation counter (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 108IW will be described. FIG. 16-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 108IW. As shown in FIG. 16-20, in the normal state, when a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability variation state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A (see steps 100IWS541 to S542). It is controlled to (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the normal state, even if the symbol is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving deviation) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if the time is lost, the number of fluctuations has reached 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss occurring after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit or time saving loss. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-20, in the probability change state, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled again (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and the relief time is not shortened. Further, in the probabilistic state, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-20, in the time saving state A, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs again. It is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state A, even if it is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, there is no case where the relief time is shortened in the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-20, in the time saving state B, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state B, even if the time saving state B is out of order, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) is controlled again (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the variation display of 30, 50, 100, or 200 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time reduction state is controlled to the time reduction state B due to the time reduction loss A during the time reduction state, the time reduction state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160 and S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the relief time is shortened in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-20, in the time saving state C, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Further, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the determined time reduction type, and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state A is configured to continue as it is. You may.

In this example, when a normal jackpot occurs during the time saving state B, the case where the time saving state A is uniformly shifted is shown, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state B is continued as it is. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed in the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, for example. , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is out.

Further, in this example, when the probability change state is controlled, the case where the probability change state is terminated based on the execution of the fluctuation display 100 times is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the probabilistic state for each variation display by a lottery process, and to end the probabilistic state based on the determination to end the probabilistic state.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 16-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In FIG. 16-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in a reduced manner of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed by alternately turning on and off the two LEDs arranged above and below on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b. Will be done.

When the fluctuation time is completed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed at the start of the symbol determination period. In this case, in the case of a big hit, the two LEDs arranged one above the other as the big hit symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in red. In addition, when the time reduction is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time reduction deviation symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when the LED is off (no time reduction), the two LEDs arranged above and below are turned off as an out-of-order symbol (no time reduction), and the stop display is displayed.

The mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is derived and displayed in a mode in which the jackpot type and the time saving type can be distinguished. May be good.

Further, in this example, the case where a dedicated symbol is provided as the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the fourth symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is provided in the case of a big hit and the case of time-saving out of time. May be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 16-22 to 16-23 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation If it is (B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 1 designation command to the relief time reduction 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 2 designation command to the relief time reduction 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a recovery time reduction time reduction command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 reaches the relief time reduction in the image display device 5 based on the received recovery time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to display the initial result according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "01 (H)" (when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100 or less), the initial result is "112". Is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial stage. "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

It should be noted that not only when the initial result suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, a display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed. , A combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Further, for example, after the power is restored, a display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or a combination of symbols suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power is restored. The suggestion display may be configured at a relatively early stage. Further, it may be configured so as not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial roll (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the relief time is shortened by the initial roll). It is possible not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations).

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the normal state (for example, a blue background image according to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a setting sun) corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via a jackpot). Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) is performed (step 100IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time saving state via the time saving state) according to the time saving state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) is performed (step 100IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, a time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to the orange background image according to the mandarin orange field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time saving state, which of the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. Display different background images depending on. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, the common background image is displayed regardless of whether the time saving state is via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured. For example, a common background image may be displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured as.

If the received effect control command is a probability change state specification command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the probability change state (for example, a red background image according to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS 640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed or the relief time is shortened (see step 100IWS1126, S1134). At the start of the symbol determination period, the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is turned on.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 100 IWS645). ). For example, when a command for designating a large prize opening is received, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that the large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration production control process)
FIG. 16-24 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demonstration effect control process. As described above, in this example, when the hold memory is not stored at the end of the symbol determination period and the end of the jackpot game (that is, when the total number of hold memories is 0), the effect control board is displayed from the main board 11. A customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted to 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, and then 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period when the variable display is not performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the telop.

FIG. 16-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 16-25, FIG. 16-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 16-25 (B) shows the set value. It is a telop display execution lottery table used when it is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 16-25 (A) and 16-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-25 (A) and 16-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

In addition, in FIG. 16-25, an example of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 is shown for simplification of the description, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a plurality of sets may be provided. A table corresponding to the set value of (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, the telop display can be performed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode. In step 105 IWS253, the effect mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

FIG. 16-25 (C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 16-25 (D) shows the set value set to "6". It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 16-25 (C) and 16-25 (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-25 (C) and 16-25 (D), in this example, the ratio of the telop display effect mode displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to be different depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (Y in step 105IWS255), the effect control CPU 120 is demonstrated. The movie is played back (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie waiting for the customer are terminated when the production control command or the like at the time of starting winning is received.

16-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the telop display. In the example shown in FIGS. 16-26, the screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), or (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 16-26 (A), if the hold storage is not stored when the symbol determination period elapses, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop display while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is decided to do so, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is determined to display the telop display according to the blue effect mode, the telop display 108IW001 with a blue edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 16-26 (B), the edge is white. It is in the form of). Further, when it is determined to display the telop display according to the red effect mode, the telop display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 16-26 (D), the edge is painted black. It is an aspect).

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12, the demonstration is performed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. As shown in FIGS. 16-26 (C) and 16-26 (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the playback of the demonstration movie.

(Read-ahead notice setting process)
16-27 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the start winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. In addition, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern is executed based on the extracted random number value. Then, after storing the hold information and the hold storage number, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination is set on the effect control board 12. Will be done. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161), for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-27, the effect control CPU 120 is used to specify an effect control command at the time of starting a prize (for example, an effect control command for designating a determination result such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead determination). ) Is received (step 108IWS701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting prize is received, the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory number including the hold memory for newly receiving the effect control command at the time of starting prize, which is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored hold memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. Then, when the number of reserved memories is not more than the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. Ends the read-ahead notice setting process.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved storage stored before the relief time is shortened, the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display when the relief time is shortened is targeted for advance notice is performed. While it is feasible, it restricts the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display when the relief time is shortened. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect across the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

When the number of reserved memories is larger than the number of remaining times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the rescue time is shortened. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the effect type when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the effect mode (step 108IWS703).

FIG. 16-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the pre-reading notice effect execution decision table, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS703, each table shown in FIGS. 16-28 is used to determine whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed, the effect type when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the effect mode.

Specifically, when the game state is different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect using the look-ahead notice effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 16-28 (A). Then, when the game state is the time saving state C, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined using the look-ahead notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 16-28 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 16-28 (A) and 16-28 (B), in this example, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit, and the big hit. In the case of, the rate of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of becoming a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead notice effect.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 16-28 (A) and 16-28 (B), the display result is different in the time saving state C than in the gaming state other than the time saving state C. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed but the big hit does not occur.

When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108 IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the execution is executed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 16-28 (C). The effect type of the look-ahead notice effect to be performed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the effect of the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is performed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 16-28 (D). Determine the type. Specifically, the type of effect is determined to be either a chance eye effect or a pending change effect.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect because the display result of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is the chance eye (“778” in this example). Is a production that suggests that is a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect of inciting whether or not the display result is the chance eye (“778” in this example) is executed. Further, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the chance eye effect is executed by the blue effect mode. The blue chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The hold change effect suggests that the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a big hit because the hold display corresponding to the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a production to do. Further, for example, when the hold change effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red hold display is displayed, and when the hold change effect is executed by the blue effect mode, the blue hold display is displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 16-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. Of FIGS. 16-29, FIGS. 16-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance eye effect, and FIGS. 16-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the pending change effect. It shows an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, it is shown in FIGS. 16-29 (B1) and (C1) after one variation display is started as shown in FIGS. 16-29 (A1). As shown, the left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-29 (D1), whether the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7", which is the chance eye "778", or "6", which is not the chance eye "778". The production that incites is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 16-29 (E1), when the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7" and the chance eye "778" is stopped and displayed, the variable display becomes a big hit in the reserved memory. It will be suggested that there may be a corresponding hold memory. In addition, after the fanning effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be stopped and displayed.

When the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-29 (A2) and (B2), when the start winning is generated, the new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), and it is suggested that a variable display that is a big hit may be executed based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is inherited as the display mode of the active display. The hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 16-29, but at any timing from the display of the new hold display in the normal mode to the end of the corresponding hold display and active display display. It may be changed to a display mode different from the normal mode.

FIG. 16-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 16-30, FIG. 16-30 (A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via the jackpot and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect, and FIG. 16-30 (B) is , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 16-30 (A) and 16-30 (B), it is assumed that the starting prizes are generated at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 16-30 (A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the variation display executed from the time when the start winning prize is generated to the start of the change display of the look-ahead target , The effect of inciting whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a fanning effect is included, when executing the chance eye effect, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variation display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-30 (A), when the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the change display of the look-ahead target is displayed from the timing when the start prize occurs or the time when the start prize occurs. The display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at an arbitrary timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. Then, the display of the hold display and the display of the active display according to the display mode after the change is continuously executed until the variable display of the look-ahead target is completed. That is, when the hold change effect is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning is generated until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends, and continues until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance eye effect and the hold change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed in a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variation display, while the hold change effect is executed over a plurality of variation displays.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state via the jackpot, the ultra-super shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of disconnection, and the shortening fluctuation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but the time saving state via relief is executed. In, the extremely ultra-shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed at the time of disconnection. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16-30, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect in the time saving state via the relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 16-28 (C) and 16-28 (D), both the chance eye effect and the hold change effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, as a look-ahead notice effect, the execution of the chance eye effect is restricted, and only the hold change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, the pre-reading advance notice effect can be suitably executed according to the game state.

Further, when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 16-28 (E) is used. , The effect mode of the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is executed using the look-ahead advance notice effect type determination table shown in FIGS. 16-28 (D). Determine the production type of. Specifically, it is determined to be either a red effect mode or a blue effect mode.

As shown in FIGS. 16-28 (E) and 16-28 (F), in this example, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the case of a big hit is out of order. It is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher depending on the red effect mode than in the case of. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the pre-reading advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 16-28 (E) and 16-28 (F), in the time saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the deterioration of the interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed is suppressed by the blue effect mode in which the big hit expectation is low. be able to. In this example, in the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, although the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the red effect mode, the display result is configured so as not to occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIGS. 16-28, a look-ahead notice is given depending on whether the time saving state C (that is, no big hit has occurred for a long period of time) or the time saving state C. The execution ratio of the production, the production type, and the ratio of the production mode can be different, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (even if only the advance notice effect with high expectation is not executed). Although it is configured to be good), the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the ratio, or may reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect of the type with high expectation.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 16-28, for example, even in the time saving state C, when the variable display that is a big hit or the time saving is executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not restricted. May be good.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance eye effect, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting of the chance eye effect in step 108IWS704. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance eye effect. The chance eye flag is reset when the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning in step 108IWS704.

(Variable display start setting process)
16-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 100IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 100 IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (probability variation jackpot symbol) in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the decorative symbols of "135" (sudden probability change big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the outlier symbol including the special symbol (for example, the star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the outlier symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and rhombic symbols) may be determined according to the time saving type. Further, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot is called the probabilistic jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) that reminds us of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 16-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108IWS802A, when the number of times remaining until the relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 16-32 (A), and the relief time reduction is performed. When the number of remaining times up to is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 16-32 (B). Further, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, the effect form of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 16-32 (C). Then, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 16-32 (D).

As shown in FIGS. 16-32 (A) and 16-32 (B), in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit. It is configured so that the rate of executing the advance notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 16-32 (A) and 16-32 (B), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). In this case, the rate of executing the advance notice effect is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10) when the display result is out of alignment. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the advance notice effect is given in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but it does not become a big hit.

Further, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed. At this time, the timer is used as a notice effect. By limiting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counters, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 16-32 (C) and 16-32 (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image are displayed). The notice effect can be executed by (displayed), and the rate of executing the notice effect according to the red effect mode is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of the loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 16-32 (C) and 16-32 (D), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). If the display result is different from the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10), the advance notice effect is executed by the red effect mode. It is configured so that the ratio of doing so is low. With such a configuration, the interest when the advance notice effect is executed in the red effect mode during the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is not a big hit. Can be suppressed.

In addition, when a plurality of types of notice effects having different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, a notice effect of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, when the jackpot expectations are classified into 5 stages,) Only for the type of notice production with a jackpot expectation of 4th stage or higher), the execution is restricted in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). May be good.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 16-32, for example, even if the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, when a variable display that is a big hit or a time reduction is executed, the advance notice effect is executed. You may not limit it.

Further, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the advance notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is lowered). It may be set (or not executed). In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the case of a loss, or it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the advance notice effect of a type with high expectation. The execution rate may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (Step 100 IWS803). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is determined by, for example, the number of relief time reductions of 2. It can be determined by checking whether or not the specified command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is until the relief time is shortened. A process table containing the fanning effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations of is selected (step 100IWS804). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 2 specified command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is set to "100". Select the process table that contains the corresponding fanning effect. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 800), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". Select a process table that includes a fanning effect according to. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the result is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 is determined by checking, for example, whether or not the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is controlled to be reduced to the time reduction state by the time reduction rush effect, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush rush effect that notifies that the display result will be a big hit after executing an effect in the same mode as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be given a surprise. You can improve your interest.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the time reduction rushing pretending effect is executed using the special relief time reduction fluctuation big hit fluctuation pattern. For example, even if the full rotation effect (that is, the jackpot is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative symbols are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, is executed. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for big hits as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time is specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is out of order when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, a dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction deviation is used. A fluctuation pattern for deviation similar to the usual one may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be shared between when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached and before it is reached, and the data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the symbol determination period elapses, the time saving state C is entered, and the background image (in this example, the orange color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the background image of the display color can be switched to (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change in the background image controls the time saving state by the relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less (). Step 108 IWS807). To check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be judged by doing.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. (Step 108 IWS808). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 specified command is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10), the count number until the relief time is reduced " Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to "10". Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1), the count until the relief time is shortened. Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and the fanning effect or the countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the background specification command for specifying the background image is configured to be transmitted, the EXT data of the background specification command is configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. You may. Then, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command and execute the fanning effect or the countdown effect.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but whether or not to execute by lottery. You may decide whether or not. Further, for example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect (for example, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed in the same manner as the effect effect). , The countdown effect and the effect effect according to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See FIG. 16-42). May be good. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect (genuine and fake) are compared to when the number of fluctuations is not 10 times or less. Including) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set (step 108IWS809). , When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table including the chance eye effect (including the effect of inciting whether or not the chance eye effect is obtained) (step 108 IWS810). .. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect that the chance eye pattern is not stopped and displayed after executing the effect of inciting whether or not it becomes the chance eye (so-called chance eye effect of Gase) is executed by lottery. You may decide whether or not to do so.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108 IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display during production processing)
16-33 and 16-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 100IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the time reduction may be delayed or the relief time may be shortened during the normal state. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time reduction is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time reduction deviation and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time is shortened. Select the process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. Whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as the relief time is shortened is determined by, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command being "00 ( It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is "H)".

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 100 IWS851). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuation effect (the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS854). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 100 IWS 856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed C command reception flag or the second confirmed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process shifts to the processing after step 100IWS858 and shifts to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 100IWS857 and the process does not shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 100 IWS862).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
16-35 is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS871). Step 100 IWS872). Final effect period after subtraction If the timer value has not timed out, the process timer value is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to n) (step 100IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol (no time reduction), time saving deviation symbol, jackpot symbol) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit medium effect including the mode transition effect (the effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state (probability change mode) or the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and the right-handed notification. (Step 100 IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 100 IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, when the missed symbol (no time reduction) or the missed symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start wait process. The value is updated according to (step S170) (step 100IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 16-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time is executed. As shown in FIGS. 16-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and the missing symbol (no time reduction). When is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-design symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIGS. 16-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the symbol determination period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 16-36 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 16-36, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (this example). Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the game state and to enjoy the hobby. Can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. 16-37 to 16-40 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 16-37 to 16-40, the effect screens transition in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 16-37 (A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol is stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, it is assumed that the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the detached symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "134") is derived and displayed when the remaining 800 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. At this time, the remaining rotation speed display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, saying "Relief time reduction starts with 800 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine provided with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-37 (B), for example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and the symbol is off (in this example, "423"). (Combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 16-37 (A), the remaining rotation speed display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, which says "Relief time reduction starts with 700 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B), a case is shown in which a fanning effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (hence, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times), the fanning effect is performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 is received, a lottery process based on a random number is performed and it is decided to execute the fanning effect. It may be configured to perform the fanning effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the fanning effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (C) to 16-38 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A according to the remaining number of rotations is displayed in the center of the screen after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. NS. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which out-of-order symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols of "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (C) to 16-38 (E), the effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the remaining rotation speed is displayed after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. .. In this example, as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the relief time shortens approach), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (E), there is only one rotation remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol is stopped and the symbol is out of alignment (in this example, the symbol is out of alignment). It is assumed that the combination of the symbols of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variation display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 (that is, the variation display that becomes the relief time reduction) is started. As shown in FIG. 16-38 (G), the time saving rushing effect for notifying that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled is started, and the time saving rushing effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled, and it is possible to improve the interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (G), when the time saving rush effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (H), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rushing effect, notifications that are generally performed during the first ending period, such as warnings for forgetting to remove the prepaid card and warnings for preventing immersiveness, may be given, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. May be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush effect may be performed in the same manner as the notification in the ending period of the first hit, or may be notified in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be performed in the time saving rush effect, but may be performed in the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time saving state due to the relief time saving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-39 (I), when the symbol determination period is entered, the mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "super heat!" Is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. After that, even in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 16-1) is operated (pressed) is displayed. NS. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the characters "press" are displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-39 (K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, "V" The character display 100IW107 of "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction is started. In addition, a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 16-39 (K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process of whether or not a big hit is obtained and a variation pattern type look-ahead determination process in the start winning prize determination process (step S101). Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 16-39 (K) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, it is highly likely that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 16-8 (E)). ), Therefore, the variable display is digested extremely quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 16-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 16-39 (K) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to the one shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 16-38 (H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-39 (L), the mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When a predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rushing pretending effect will be described. FIG. 16-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the production mode of the time-saving rushing pretending effect. The example shown in FIGS. 16-41 follows the example of FIGS. 16-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in FIG. 16-41 (E), there is only one rotation left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol stops and comes off (in this example, "123". (Combination of symbols) is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-41 (F'), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is started. In this variable display, the relief time is shortened, but the display result is a big hit. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, it does not shift to the time saving state due to the relief time saving, but shifts to the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-41 (G'), the time-saving rushing effect pretending effect is started, and the time-saving rushing effect display 100IW104C having the same mode as the time-saving rushing effect is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 16-41 (G'), when the time saving rushing effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed, as in the case of starting the time saving rushing effect. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C is completed, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254") is not displayed. Only the combination of) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to the big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the character game that controls the configuration of the feature unit 108IW to the big hit game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in the specific area (V winning area) in the character during the small hit game is also executed. When applied to a game machine that is configured to be possible, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the relief time is a small hit, a time saving rush pretending effect is executed to notify that the small hit is achieved. May be good.

Next, a mode of producing a so-called Gase countdown effect and an effect effect will be described. FIG. 16-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect.

As shown in FIGS. 16-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A according to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, a state of counting down from "10" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase effect effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10. The effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the display range becomes wider (the number of the symbols displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are displayed before the remaining number of revolutions is displayed in a mode corresponding to one time until the transition to the relief time reduction. Is terminated. At this time, since the remaining number of revolutions is not 0 until the transition to the relief time reduction, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

When the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect as shown in FIGS. 16-42 are configured to be executable, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (A) and (B). You may not perform the fanning effect that suggests. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between genuine and fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the remaining number of revolutions until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time is explained, and the countdown is displayed, but it may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol or during the fluctuation.

Further, in this example, the case where the symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and the mode transition effect or the right-handed notification is executed in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is shown, but the symbol confirmation period is the normal 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction count is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed, when the jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is lost is shown. Or, when it is configured to execute a story such as whether to make it fluctuate at high speed, it may be configured to clear the selection buffer and the story counter of the story. In addition, a story may be configured to be settable when the relief time is activated, or a different story may be configured to be settable according to the game state.

(Modification example 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, a symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 second, is set, and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation is provided, and the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a modified example 1 in which a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification are executed with a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation will be described.

FIG. 16-43 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the first modification. As shown in FIGS. 16-43, in the modified example 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 14, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In the first modification, the start winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. Further, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. Further, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”.

Further, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”.

Further, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Further, the jackpot end processing (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”.

Further, the small hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. Further, the small hit opening process (step 100 IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. Further, the small hit end process (step 100 IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “11”.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the processes of the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. Is. Further, in the modified example 1, in the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113), the same 0.5 seconds as usual is set as the symbol determination period even when the relief time is shortened. , The first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is transmitted, which is different from the special symbol variation processing (step S112) and the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG.

In the first modification, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit end processing (step 100IWS121) are the processes of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) to the small hit end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. Is similar to.

FIG. 16-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100 IWS113) in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 16-16 and 16-17. In the first modification, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example). A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The process of step 100 IWS175 is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 16-17.

FIG. 16-45 is a flowchart showing the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS 114) in the first modification. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). .. If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS193) and sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In the modified example 1, in the next fluctuation postponement processing, a case is shown in which the time is shortened at the timing when the postponement period (20 seconds in this example) until the start of the next fluctuation has elapsed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, in the next fluctuation postponement process, right-handed notification may be performed, and the time may be shortened at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to control the time saving state and perform right-handed notification, or it may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling the time saving state. Aspects are conceivable.

Further, in the first modification, the case where 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement processing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set ("800" is set) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction is configured to be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is performed during the normal state and the time reduction is performed. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, when the relief time is shortened during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period is set as compared with the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and the measurement is performed in the next fluctuation postponement process, and the relief time is shortened for the second and subsequent times. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative symbol, but displays only the small symbol so that the small symbol is not hidden by the effecting object or the like. May be good.

Further, in the modified example 1, when the relief time is shortened, the case where the next fluctuation postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started is shown, but the variation display of the time reduction is not limited to such a mode. Also, it may be configured to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement processing similar to the first variation.

Further, as described above, when applied to the variation display of the time saving deviation, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIGS. 16-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period of the fluctuation display when the time reduction is lost can be shared to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuation display, and the processing related to right-handed notification can also be performed in the case of relief time reduction. Can be executed in the same process as.

FIG. 16-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variation display that shortens the relief time in the first modification is executed. As shown in FIGS. 16-46, in the modified example 1, in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time is shortened (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is terminated and the pattern is removed. When the symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5-second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Then, when the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds is completed, as shown in FIGS. 16-46, the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds is started (see step 100 IWS114). Then, in the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIGS. 16-46, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the next fluctuation postponement period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 16-46. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 16-46, the background image (the present) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. In the example, it is switched to the background image of the orange display color).

In the case of the configuration as in the first modification, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the outlier symbol, and after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the next fluctuation postponement process is started (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period). At the start), 4 jackpot signals may be output. The four jackpot signals here are signals that are output externally during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display symbol determination period in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

Further, in the case of the configuration as in the modified example 1, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that the player makes a right-handed strike. A test signal or an external output signal indicating the above may be output, or a right-handed notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed strike and to notify right-handed strike at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 16-8 (E)) is uniformly selected during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, and the fluctuation of the high speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is performed. The case where the display is executed is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. 16-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the modified examples 2 to 4 of the modified example 8-37, which is a method of selecting the variation pattern in the time-reduced state based on the relief time-saving.

First, with reference to FIG. 16-47 (A), a method of selecting a fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving in the modification 2 will be described. In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, when the variation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing (without becoming a big hit or a time saving loss), or after the big hit or the time saving is lost (the next big hit or the time saving is lost). Fluctuation pattern tables F, G (FIGS. 16-8 (F), (G)) from 10 before the fluctuation, which uniformly shortens the relief time, without distinguishing whether or not the fluctuation display is executed 800 times (without becoming). Select (see) and execute the fluctuation display for 5 seconds or 12 seconds at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect. After the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig.) (Refer to 16-8 (E)) is selected to execute the fluctuation display of the high-speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, but the mode is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in the second modification of FIG. 16-47, when the relief time is shortened by executing the fluctuation display 800 times after the RAM clearing process, the relief time is shortened from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before. Also selects the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 16-7 (B)) to execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the relief time reduction, the fluctuation pattern table C (FIG. 16-7) (See (C)) may be selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the fluctuation display of 5 seconds may be executed at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 3 of FIGS. 16-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display 800 times after the big hit, the variation is changed when the 800th variation display is executed. A variation pattern for relief time saving variation deviation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected from the pattern table I (see FIG. 16-8 (I)), and variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. The feature unit 108IW is configured to execute a time saving rush effect during the variation display, and execute a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification during the symbol confirmation period. For example, during the variation display for 25 seconds. In, the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification may be executed (therefore, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 16-47, if the relief time is shortened after the RAM clear processing and the relief time is shortened after the big hit, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display that is the relief time is different. It is possible to make the effect different, and it is also possible to make the effect different from the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 4 of FIG. 16-47, the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 16-7 (B)) is selected even from 10 fluctuations before the relief time to 1 fluctuation before the relief time is shortened. Perform the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Fig. 16-7 (C)) during the time reduction state based on the first relief time reduction, and select the fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when passing through the jackpot. Select to execute a 5-second variation display at a high rate, select the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 16-8 (E)) during the time reduction state based on the second relief time reduction, and select a high speed of 1.5 seconds. It may be configured to perform a variation display of the variation.

Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-48 to 16-54. In addition, about Example 2, the part which is different from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as in the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 16-8 (F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 16-8 (G), immediately before the relief time is shortened. There is no variable pattern table for this. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 16-8 (F) and 16-8 (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the player notices that it is immediately before the relief time reduction due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). Is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the relief time is shortened as in the fluctuation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 16-8 (I) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 16-8 (J). There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 16-48 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 16-7 (A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 16-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 16-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 16-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 16-7 and 16-8 should be used (step 100IWS1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demonstration production control process in Example 2)
As described above, in Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see FIGS. 16-26), but the relief is performed depending on whether or not this telop display is executed and the production mode. It is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the time is shortened and the relief time is close. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the telop display for explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

Also in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the effect mode. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the telop display is restricted (for example, the execution rate decreases) as compared with the period before that. Or do not do it). With this configuration, when the relief time is shortened, the background image is suddenly changed (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time is started) is suddenly executed, which surprises the player. It can be given to improve the interest.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 16-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 16-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 16-50 (A) regardless of the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. Further, when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed, the effect mode of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 16-50 (B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16-50 (A) and 16-50, regardless of the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode when the advance notice effect is executed are determined. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Further, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the time saving state C is shifted, the background image corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed in the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image of the orange display color) is configured to be switched (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (that is, a notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. The process for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the process for displaying the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, also in Example 2, it may be possible to execute a fanning effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect is restricted (for example). , The execution rate decreases, or does not execute). With this configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised and the interest is improved. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (Normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rushing effect and the time-saving rushing masquerading effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 16-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-51, in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the special symbol fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time () after the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. When (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, it ends, and when the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-design symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started as in the immediately preceding variation display. When the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, the missed symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS1137). Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 16-51, the background image (this example) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-51, the right-handed notification is executed during the period in which the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the transition to the time saving state C (FIG. 16-52 (C1). )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is a right-handed game while suppressing the production related to the transition to the time saving state C from becoming complicated, and the player is disadvantaged. Can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 16-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 16-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (A), when the variation display for shortening the relief time is started and the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (B). In addition, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of the outlier symbols.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (C1), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

If the hold memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the image display device 5 is based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (C2). In the above, the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) may be switched, and the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, at the timings shown in FIGS. 16-52 (C1) and 16-52 (C2), the explanation regarding the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B) (for example, the relief time reduction function and the relief time reduction) (Explanation of the production in) may be performed. Further, although the effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is near is not executed, the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B) is performed at an arbitrary timing. May be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIGS. 16-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Can be improved.

In addition, the change in the gaming state can be clearly notified to the player, and the interest when the relief time is shortened can be improved. In addition, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 16-52. For example, the modification 1 shown in FIGS. 16-53 and the modification 2 shown in FIG. 16-53 may be used.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification example 1])
FIG. 16-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 1 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 16-53, as shown in FIG. 16-53 (A), the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped, and then the variation display that shortens the relief time is started. As shown in FIG. 16-53 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is executed. Will be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 16-53 (C), the blackout state is eliminated, and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived by a combination of the outlier symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 16-53 (D), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. At the timing of FIG. 16-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or an output sound for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is performed. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 16-53 can be obtained by selecting, for example, a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a relief time reduction in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification 2])
FIG. 16-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 16-54, as shown in FIG. 16-54 (A), the variation display that shortens the relief time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds), as shown in FIGS. 16-54 (B), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5 in combination with the detached symbols. However, at the timing shown in FIGS. 16-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed, the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before. Will be executed. Further, the special symbol fluctuation time elapses while the time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is being executed, and the small symbol 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of the outlier symbols. The time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed even during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 16-54 (D), the blackout state is eliminated in the image display device 5, and the time saving state C ( It is possible to switch to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state (time saving state via the relief time saving). Further, as shown in FIG. 16-54 (D), right-handed notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 16-53 can be obtained by selecting, for example, a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a relief time reduction in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

Relief by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B) at the timings of FIGS. 16-53 (C), (D), 16-54 (C), (D), etc. An explanation regarding the time reduction (for example, an explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) may be given. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach is determined. , The decision to execute the advance notice effect is restricted, while in the second embodiment, none of them is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period of (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the notice of the type in which the degree of expectation is not so high among the notice effects is determined. The production may be made feasible. That is, it is possible to limit the determination of the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach, and also limit the execution of the notice effect of the type with high expectation among the advance notice effects.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, as an effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect), a fanning effect or a countdown effect, The effect effect is executed, and the initial appearance and the telop display waiting for the customer (for example, the telop display 108IW101 shown in FIGS. 16-26) are displayed according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened. Not limited. For example, an operation effect of operating the movable body 32 at an arbitrary timing during the fluctuation display or a fluctuation stop, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific mode (for example, a rainbow is made to emit light), or a movable body 32. Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of the vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like, it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, an effect control command (for example, an effect control command instructing recovery from a power failure or an effect control command instructing initialization) transmitted when the power is turned on is transmitted. , When the effect cannot be received normally on the production control board 12 side (for example, when a command is missed or a command is garbled), it is usually based on a command for specifying a game state or a command for specifying a fluctuation pattern. Although the effect of It may be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, transmission is performed each time the variation display is executed) to specify the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction. If the message is not received normally, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specified command could not be received normally, or the relief may be performed until the next big hit occurs. The suggestion effect may not be executed. In addition, for example, when reception is not performed normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in an effect mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that shortens the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to the time reduction). You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a case where the application is applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variation display result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a character game that controls a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a specific area (V winning area) in the character during a small hit game. The configuration for controlling the feature portion 108IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear processing is executed or the jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter at random may be set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving flag C is set each time the relief time saving occurs is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has been transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numerical value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving have different effects (variation patterns) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving may have the same effect (variation pattern). Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 16-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state after the big hit and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the effect (variation pattern) is different between the time reduction state of the time reduction and the relief time reduction is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (fluctuation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is off and the relief time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 16-39 (K), notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state that is out of the time reduction and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

As described above, the features 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) is provided, and the state control means is updated by the update means. By setting the numerical information to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, it is possible to control the game to a special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-13). The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the computer 100 for game control, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), the updating means is the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the above is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Steps in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 16-49, which can execute a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is being executed. 108IWS811 is executed) and a special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-52 (C1) and (C2)) for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition. Special notification that can execute (such as changing the background image, blacking out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 16-53 (B), blacking out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 16-54 (C), etc.) Production execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-23) The effect control CPU 120 further includes (a portion where the step 100 IWS638 is executed), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 16). As shown in −44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See Figure 16-50). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification effect is the special notification effect in the display means. This is an embodiment in which it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display displayed before the start (for example, blackout is performed at the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 16-53 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification effect is an embodiment in which the identification information for the effect is difficult to see (for example). , Black out at the end of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 16-54 (C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. In this mode, the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. NS). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any one of means 1A to 4A, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (for example, FIGS. 16-52 (C1), (C2). ), At the timing shown in FIGS. 16-53 (D) and 16-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns) shows a variation pattern shown in FIGS. 16-48. The variable display pattern determining means is provided with a variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined when the special condition is satisfied and even before the special condition is satisfied. )), The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. A portion for executing S112) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A buffer), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the update means and hold information stored by the hold storage means even when the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An initialization means capable of executing an initialization process for initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) and backup storage when the power supply is started. A recovery means capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6). Part) and. According to such a configuration, a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the special number of times is stored before the power supply is stopped while optimizing the control by the initialization process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C) capable of identifying that the special state is controlled, and a special state storage means. Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of the time reduction counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed in the state, and special state information and execution count information even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means that can hold numerical information (for example, RAM 102) and an initialization means that can execute an initialization process that initializes the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, game control). A portion of the computer 100 for executing step S8), and the initialization means holds special state information, execution count information, and numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time reduction flags A to C and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), a predetermined variable display pattern, and a predetermined variable display pattern are more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern having a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)). A pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 16-14) is provided, and the state control means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information is changed depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is executed. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not (for example, FIG. 16-7 (for example, FIG. 16-7). A) , (B), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of a miss). When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), the variable pattern PA2- 2 (super reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are more likely to be determined in the case of a big hit than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation)), before the special conditions are satisfied. In the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that in the period before the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 16-8 (F)). , (G), the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low immediately before the relief time is shortened). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means is provided. The rate of executing the suggestion effect is higher in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control CPU 120 in step 108IWS807. A portion for executing ~ S809; a portion for the effect control CPU 120 to execute 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to establish the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B), a telop display 100IW103 is used for explanation). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 3B. The notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. Is higher in the case where the specific display result is obtained than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31), the rate of executing the advance notice effect when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result is lower than that of the period before the predetermined period. , The portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS802A. See FIGS. 16-32 (A) and 16-32 (B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 5B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 4B. The notice effect executing means is provided with means, and the specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") is defined in both the case where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the case where the display result is not the specific display result. The notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that of the predetermined mode. When the variable display display result is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is less than the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 16-32 (C) and 16-32). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the special variable display pattern (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1 (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1)) can update the numerical information. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 16-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including (rushing off)). The state control means can control the state when the special condition is satisfied by setting the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in FIG. 16-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means in the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-14, the portion where steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special variable is not determined. When the variable display by the display pattern is executed, the specific notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31) capable of executing the specific notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled is used for game control. A portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 108 IWS806B. 16-38 (G), (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification effect executing means executes the specific notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display that is possible and the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the effect of the same mode as the specific notification effect is executed. Is executed by the special notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31, step 108 IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100). 41 (see G') and (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the special condition, it is notified that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is satisfied. A predetermined notification effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, full rotation effect) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode common to that before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the value varies as in the case where the value is not 0. It is provided with a pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and a fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (realized by being determined by super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the variable display display result when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. The special condition is satisfied for longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS1135 as shown in FIGS. 16-15). In the display period of the display result of the variable display at the time of the operation, the notification effect execution means (for example, FIG. 16-33) capable of executing the notification effect (for example, the mode transition effect) for notifying that the control of the special state is started is shown. As shown, the effect control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes step 100 IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) At the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied in any of the means 1C to the means 5C, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. Is output, and after the specific signal is output, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, four jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state is provided (see, for example, FIG. 16-18). According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 7C) In the means 6C, the signal output means performs a special process (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIGS. 16-45) executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. ) Is started, a special signal is output. According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, a left-handed route) can pass. ), A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of one start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition (for example, game control). A part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route (for example, in a gaming state in which the player is expected to make a right-handed strike). It is provided with a special output means capable of executing an output of a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the computer is present, and a notification that the player is in a state of right-handed striking. Is satisfied based on the passage of, the second start condition is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage region, and the special output means is the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. The special output can be executed at the start of the special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIGS. 16-45) that is executed after the display period of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) and a variable display pattern for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. A display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 16-48) is provided, and the state control means is variable in the numerical information updated by the updating means. By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of display execution, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed by variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special condition is satisfied. After the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display to be performed, a special notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started (for example, a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction (for example) Orange) display) can be executed A special notification effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable display pattern can be standardized when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112). A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met, and hold storage. The look-ahead notice execution means is provided with a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means. Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a look-ahead advance notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, while the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is satisfied. The execution of the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display after the display is the target of the notice is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-27, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect can be executed. Is an embodiment in which the background display in the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 16-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to means 3D, a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer, etc.) related to the establishment of a special condition is provided. , The suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the suggestion effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 5D) An explanatory effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 16-52 (C1), (C2)) capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition in any of the means 1D to the means 4D. At the timings shown in FIGS. 16-53 (D) and 16-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) and 16-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 16-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and variable display are executed. From the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined variable display pattern, which can update the numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a variable display pattern determining means) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) in which the variable display period is shortened. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a portion that executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 16-14), and the state control means is based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. After being controlled to an advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-19, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the game control microcomputer. The portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in 100, the portion for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is actually performed. As for the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-14, in a high proportion of determining the shortened variable display pattern when a specific display result is obtained. See FIGS. 16-7 (C) and 16-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display being executed by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. Will be shortened, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 16-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and variable display are executed. An update means capable of updating numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion in which step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of reach effect. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 includes a portion (a part for executing the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 16-14), and the state control means is in an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. The variable display pattern determining means does not specify the display result of the variable display in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-14, at a low rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result is obtained. See FIGS. 16-7 (C) and 16-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display display result by the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result becomes low, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In the means 1E, a background display means capable of displaying different background displays in the display means depending on the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-23, a portion for executing steps 100 IWS634 and S638 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or the means 2E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. And a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. , A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and executes the look-ahead notice. The means is a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect, and any of a plurality of types of look-ahead notice. The ratio of whether or not to execute the effect is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS703. See FIGS. 16-28 (A) and 16-28). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the look-ahead advance notice effect are determined between the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be different and can improve the interest.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to the means 3E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. (Part where S112 is executed) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A buffer) and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) for a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. The look-ahead notice execution means can execute a look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. The execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is to be announced is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-27, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) is provided, and the state control means is updated by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, step 100 IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In this example, the case where the initial value is set in the relief time reduction counter when a big hit occurs is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (big hits that are not given time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set for some jackpots. It may be configured as follows.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In the means 1a, the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display (means 2a). For example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the game control microcomputer. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game because the display result, which is disadvantageous to the player, is relieved when the display result is continuously derived and displayed.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or the means 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) (for example, FIG. 16). As shown in -17, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

In this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated based on the low probability low base (normal state), the high probability high base (probability variation state), and the low probability high base (time reduction state) is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states of low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability change state), low probability high base (time reduction state), and high probability low base (latent probability change). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it can be applied to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to a normal state in a probabilistic state.

In this example, the case where the second special symbol is preferentially digested is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the first starting winning opening, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently is provided, and the game balls are digested in the order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special. The symbols may be configured to fluctuate at the same time.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets numerical information as an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-16, a game control microcomputer. The portion of the 100 that executes the step 100IWS135, the portion that executes the step 100IWS144, and the portion that executes the step 100IWS167 of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, a predetermined condition is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-16, a portion for executing step 100 IWS 135 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 16). As shown in -17, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS166), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17, the game is played. The part that executes step 100 IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-16, the portion where the step 100 IWS 144 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information to be updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped. , Set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of the initialization process) (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-11, a game control microcomputer. (Part of executing step 100IWS12 in 100), a predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-11, a part of executing step 100IWS8 and step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. Can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any of the means 1a to the means 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIGS. 16-47). It may be configured as shown in Example 4). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By changing the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 10a) In any of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, FIG. 16-47). It may be configured as shown in the modified example 2 and the modified example 3). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. Therefore, by intentionally performing the same effect, the advantageous state is obtained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested in the game.

Further, in the present feature portion 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming area that is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can divide the game medium into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path). Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part to execute step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the updating means (for example, the part where the numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display). As shown in FIG. 16-13, a game required to execute a plurality of types of processes including a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), variable display control, and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control computer 100) that updates a data value indicating a progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13). In addition, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), the updating means is Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-13, the game control microcomputer 100 The process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the step 100 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part where S110 to S113 are executed), the data value is When the second numerical value is different from the first numerical value, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the portion where steps S114 to S117 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is When the first numerical value and the third numerical value are different from the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-43). (Part of executing step 100 IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), in the normal state, the game medium is launched to the first path to perform the game, and in the special state, the game medium is launched to the second path to play the game. It is characterized in that it is provided with a launch promotion notification means (see FIGS. 16-46) that executes a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 16-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , The part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and the variable display is executed. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control are provided. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14) for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including the process and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for game control). The state control means is provided with (a part for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means is put into a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, a step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS172, the part where step 100IWS173 is executed), the updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 16-13, the process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the portion that executes the step 100 IWS 67 in the game control microcomputer 100) (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the portion in which steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 14, game control micro data (Part of executing steps S114 to S117) in the computer 100), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls the third numerical value to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. A notification effect that executes a process (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-43, a portion that executes step 100 IWS 114 in the game control microcomputer 100) and notifies that the third process is controlled to a special state during execution. (See FIGS. 16-46). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In this example, the case where the processing related to the big hit is prioritized is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to give priority to the process related to the variable display and the process related to the relief time reduction.

In this example, the case of right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement processing, which is the third processing, is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute only the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the time saving state without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and the means 1b-2, the processing executing means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (means 2b). For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 may be executed and step 100IWS114 may not be executed). According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, for game control. The process executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 16). As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, FIG. As shown in 16-16, the part that executes step 100 IWS 145 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 16-14, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-14, step 100 IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes) may be configured. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-15, for game control. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1c) to (means 6c).

(Means 1c) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and a game control means (for example, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14) that can control the game, and a variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, as shown in FIGS. 16-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. The game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17). In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, the updating means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means The state control means includes a state information control means for controlling the identifiable state information, and the state control means is put into a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-12, the part where step 100IWS64 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-17. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173) in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means includes a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. In number The value information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-16, the portion for executing step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is "0". ”), The state information is set as the second numerical value when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and then controlled to the advantageous state and then to the special state (for example, FIG. 16-19). As shown in the above, the part that executes step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is “1”), based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied. When controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17, a portion for executing step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. That is, the time saving flag C is set, the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), and the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when it is in a special state, the state information It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case where is the second numerical value and the case where is the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 16-10, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the game control microcomputer. A portion of the computer 100 that executes step 100IWS540, and a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS90174). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In this example, the case where the time saving state A designation command and the time saving state C designation command are transmitted as specific information is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a mode that can be identified as being in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. May be good. In addition, for example, when a big hit occurs, a big hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes depending on the game state, and depending on which command is received. It may be configured so that the fanfare period and the ending period change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, the state information control means transfers the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value when the special condition is satisfied again after being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or the means 2c, the effect control means controls the state to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. The effect may be different from that when the special state is controlled based on the above (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to execute steps 100 IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to the means 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means is special. It is possible to execute a common effect when the condition is controlled based on the condition being satisfied (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the fact that the state control means derives and displays the special display result. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the state control means is controlled to the special state or the state control means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 100 IWS636). It may be configured to execute S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means can control the effect. It is common when the state control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. The effect may be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display a common background image in step 100IWS636 and step 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) and a variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, as shown in FIGS. 16-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. The game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17). In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing step 100IWS173, and a portion for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, when the numerical information can be updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped. The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is special because the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When the condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion in which step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-17. , The part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means depends on the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means produces predetermined information when the power supply is started. It can be transmitted to the control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-11, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS11), and the effect control means receives power based on the reception of predetermined information. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-22, a portion where step 100 IWS630 is executed in the effect control CPU 120). And. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

In this example, the initial appearance is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a change in the background, an effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and a suggestion effect by displaying on a demo screen or a menu screen.

When a command for specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 16-12) is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. ..

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can identify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started (for example, FIG. As shown in 16-11, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 100 IWS11). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

In this example, a command that can specify the value of the relief time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in 100 rotation units, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, ... 500 to 599 rotations can be specified, and so on. If the value of the time reduction counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if it is 127 or less, a identifiable command may be transmitted.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or means 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-14). (Part of executing step 100 IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on specific information (a part that executes a special effect). For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31), as specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Second specific information that can specify that the difference between the first specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-9, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1) and the number of executions of the variable display and the special number is larger than a predetermined value. And (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-9, a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2) may be configured to include. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

In this example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted. I can't be limited. For example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 specified command, may not be transmitted.

(Means 4d) In any of the means 1d to the means 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 100 IWS847, FIGS. 16-39 (I) to 16-40 (M). )), It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display of the second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the variable display of the special number of times is executed (for example, in FIG. 16-31). As shown, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 100 IWS804 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) to 16-38 (F). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

In this example, the case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) shown below.

(Means 1e-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 16-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, FIG. 16-17). As shown, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and as shown in FIG. 16-19, a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part where the step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether ), When the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. , When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the specific display result is controlled to the special state. It is characterized in that different effects are executed (for example, the portion shown in the modified example 2 and the modified example 3 of FIGS. 16-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 16-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, FIG. 16-17). As shown, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and as shown in FIG. 16-19, a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part where the step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether ), When the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. , When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized and then controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, and after being controlled to the special state in It is characterized in that different effects are executed (for example, the portion shown in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 16-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

In this example, the case where only the fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case of after a big hit.

The configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to the feature unit 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is a variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of, and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes the special number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by becoming the corresponding specific value, and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, and the advantageous state is controlled depending on which of the plurality of types is controlled. The advantage of the special state controlled after is different, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. , The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the special advantageous state is the probability variation jackpot, the specific advantage state is the normal jackpot, and the time reduction state after the probability variation time reduction is the normal jackpot. The advantage may be higher than the time saving state of, and the time saving state of the relief time saving may be configured to have a higher advantage than the time saving state after the normal big hit.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage after being controlled is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 2f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the 2nd special symbol are different, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled in a short relief time depending on whether the jackpot is controlled based on the 1st special symbol or the jackpot based on the 2nd special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or means 2f, a disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is the first probability, and an advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting of a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting of an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". And, when it is set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations which is a condition for controlling the relief time is smaller than when it is set to an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"). However, the advantage in the relief time reduction may be configured to be higher than the advantage in the time reduction state after the big hit. It should be noted that the one set to the disadvantageous setting (for example, "1") has a higher relief time reduction arrival rate than the one set to the advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), and the relief time reduction is always shortened. Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, the time saving number is 100 times after the normal big hit).

(Means 4f) In any of means 1f to means 3f, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the set value is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any of the means 1f to the means 4f, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display, and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when a big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when a big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to means 5f, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 16-8 (E).

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to means 6f, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect is provided, and a variable display pattern is provided. The determining means is when the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result in the variable display display result in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 16-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to means 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 16-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually used. A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than a state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and a start condition are satisfied as well as a start condition. Variable display execution means that can execute variable display based on the above, hold storage means that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and power supply is stopped. When the information is set, the backup storage means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information, the initialization means that can initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the power supply are started. The state control means is provided with a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the backup storage means. , The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that it can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the recovered pending information, and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In order to apply the game machine of the means 1g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are reset when the initialization process is executed, while the power failure is restored. The relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th fluctuation and the condition for controlling the relief time reduction is satisfied, the relief time reduction can be controlled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage after being controlled is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the second special symbol are different, and when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol, the fluctuation that is the condition for controlling the relief time is shortened. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or the means 2g, the disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability and the advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting of a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting of an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the setting value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, when the setting is disadvantageous (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced and the relief time is shortened, as compared with the case where the setting value is advantageous (for example, "6"). The advantage of the above may be set to be higher than the advantage of the time saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the setting of an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of being out of order than the setting of an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), so that the relief time is likely to be shortened. Since the relief time is always 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, after the normal big hit, the time reduction is 100 times). May be good.

(Means 4b) In any of means 1g to means 3g, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the means is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any of the means 1g to the means 4g, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when a big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when a big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any of the means 1g to the means 5g, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on the structure which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 16-8 (E), for example.

(Means 7g) In any one of the means 1g to the means 6g, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect is provided, and the variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on the structure which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 16-8 (E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to the means 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 16-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is an update means. The numerical information updated by is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition is further provided, and the suggestion effect is provided. Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, the execution means differs in the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied. It is a mode to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown effect in an aspect suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition to be controlled in the relief time reduction. The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 16-25 to determine whether or not the telop display while waiting for a customer is executed and the effect mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect in a mode of suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition controlled to shorten the relief time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or the means 2h, the suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of a color and a size is different, and is displayed in any of the modes. The period until the suggested special conditions are met differs depending on whether or not it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the aspect of the specific image.

In addition, in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for a customer and the mode of production by using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 16-25. Originally. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers to be counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to be different according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to the means 3h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 16-25 to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to the means 4h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 16-25 to determine the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for customers.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to the means 5h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect executing means includes at least one of the detection that the operation means is operated and the detection that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 6h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when the state shifts to the demo state, the gaming ball is operated by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 or at the starting port. When it is detected, it may be configured to execute a telop display suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 7h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display while waiting for a customer is executed by using the table shown in FIG. 16-25.

(Means 8h) In any of the means 1h to the means 7h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 8h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display is executed while waiting for a customer, and the effect mode, using the table shown in FIG. 16-25.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any set value from a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state, and a set value set. The setting suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect execution means are provided, and the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion is made. The effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the suggestion effect regardless of which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), the telop display waiting for a customer is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(Means 10h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h and the means 9h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is set. The setting suggestion effect executing means that can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means performs the setting suggestion effect according to a specific mode according to which setting value is set. The ratio of execution is different, and the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is the same regardless of which set value is set for the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), no matter which set value is set, the customer is waiting in the red effect mode. It suffices to configure so that the execution ratio of the telop display of is common.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to the means 10h, the suggestion effect executing means supplies power depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display and the countdown effect waiting for customers differs between after the initialization process and after the power failure is restored. It may be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) In any one of means 1h to 11h, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has special conditions. When the special variable display pattern is satisfied, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed, the special state is set. Further provided is a specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying the fact that it is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

In the feature portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using the relief time saving variation deviation pattern table shown in FIG. 16-8 (I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to the means 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the variable display display result is a specific display result or not. Yes, when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the previous period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on, for example, a configuration using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 16-8 (F) and 16-8 (G).

(Means 14h) In any one of the means 1h to the means 13h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the variable display is displayed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 14h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, for example, by using the table shown in FIG. 16-32.

(Means 15h) In any of the means 1h to the means 14h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect according to the specific mode and the predetermined mode regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not, and the variable display is displayed. When the result is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 16-32 to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (2)

In addition to executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, the display result is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information including the specific effect identification information, and the specific display result is derived. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when displayed.
As a variable display, a specific effect capable of executing a specific effect that temporarily stops the specific effect identification information and then resumes the variable display at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. Production execution means and
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
An update method that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display,
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state.
As the notification effect, the notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed continuously,
The effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times.
The updating means is a gaming machine characterized in that numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. While executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, the display result is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed, the game is played. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person.
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, the special identification information different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is restarted. Specific effect execution means that can execute the effect,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
An update method that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display,
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the second low visibility state to a low level.
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Can be displayed and
The effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times.
The updating means is a gaming machine characterized in that numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.

Images